Transcripts
1. Promotional Video: Hi, everyone. My name is Chris and welcome to
the Autodesk Inventor, 2025, complete beginners guide. I am an automotive
design engineer with extensive experience in off road vehicle design and
military applications. With over 15 years
of experience, utilizing various CAT softwares, I have found Autodesk
inventor to be one of the most comprehensive and user friendly industry
standard tools available. This beginner friendly course
will guide you step by step through the powerful capabilities
of autodesk inventor. Whether you are an aspiring engineer, an
engineering student, or a professional
working in the industry, this course is designed for you. Throughout this course,
you will learn how to navigate the various
file interfaces, create paths and sketches, build three D assembly models, and produce detailed two
D engineering drawings to industry standards. Throughout the course are
exams and tests that will enable you to apply the skills and techniques that
you will learn. This course is structured
in a logical order to build your skills and knowledge in
this powerful CAD software. And by the end of this course, you will possess the
necessary skills to use Autodesk Iventer for
personal projects, academic work, or professional
engineering tasks. So let's dive into the world of three D
mechanical design.
2. Course Overview: This course consists
of seven sections, which are structured
in an order that provides a progressive
learning experience, enabling you to enhance your understanding of
inventor's tools. By the end of this
course, you'll have the skills and knowledge necessary to create a wide range of designs at an
intermediate level. So let's explore each one
of these seven sections. In the first section
of this course, we will explore the home screen
interface and navigation. Specifically, we will cover how to create and edit projects. As part of this
process, we will create a dedicated project for this
course and its contents. Additionally, we
will take a look at the default templates
supplied within inventor and focus on templates for parts,
drawings, and assemblies. This will include
an understanding of the properties associated
with each template type. Lastly, we will learn how to determine the units for
different file types. This will ensure
that we can confirm whether we are working with
metric units, for example, millimeters and kilograms
or imperial units, I inches and pounds, based on the requirements
of the project. The second section, we'll focus on part files and sketching. We'll begin by exploring the user interface
of Part files, understanding the available
tools and their locations, and additionally, we will learn how to customize
the environment, including adjusting
settings such as background colors and
other visual preferences. Next, we'll take a look at
the fundamental sketch tools. We'll cover a
variety of options, including the line tools,
rectangular tools, hex tools, slot tools, circle tools, and of
course, the arc tools. Following this, we will explore the fundamental sketch
modification tools that allow for
precise adjustment. We will then move on to
patterning sketches, so how we can implement
linear patterns, circular patterns, and
sketch mirroring techniques. Within sketch mode, we will
also cover dimension control, and I'll give you a
detailed overview of constraints and how they can be used to accurately define geometry based on
specific requirements. To reinforce learning,
I will provide three practice assignments
under sketching. These are designed
to help you apply the tools and techniques
covered in this section. These assignments will test your knowledge of
sketching fundamentals. Should you have any
questions during these, please don't hesitate
to reach out to me. And finally, in this section, I will present three
sketching examples where I will demonstrate how to create fairly complex sketches using all the tools
covered in this section. I would encourage you to
attempt these sketches on your own before watching
the full demonstration. In Section three, this is where we will begin three D modeling. We'll start off with the
extrude tool and we'll learn how to add and remove
material to our parts. We'll then take a
look at the revolve modeling tool and understand its application based on
part geometry and features. Then we'll study
the sweep tool and identify when and where
to use it effectively, based on the parts
design requirements. We'll then learn how
to add engraved and embossed texts such as logos, brands, part numbers,
and similar features. Moving on, we'll study
the shell and hole features and how to
apply threaded features, including both male
and female threads, IE for fasteners
and threaded holes. We'll then study how to
assign materials to parts and customize their appearance for a more realistic representation. You will then be provided with three practice assignments. Each assignment
involves creating a three D model based
on defined dimensions. And these exercises
are designed to test your ability to apply the tools and techniques
learned in this section. At the conclusion
of this section, you'll have access to three
complex modeling examples. Here I will demonstrate the complete process
of sketching and remodeling these parts using the tools learned
in this section. And again, you are
encouraged to attempt these models on your own before watching the full demonstration, but otherwise, feel free just
to watch the complete demo. In Section four, we focus
on creating assemblies by combining individual
three D model parts. We'll start with modeling
a bearing block assembly. So we'll model
each part required to create the bearing
block assembly, and I will guide
you step by step through the process of
designing these parts. Once the individual
parts are modeled, we'll then create an
assembly file where we will place and learn how
to position each part. After the parts are placed, we'll then study how we can
assign various types of mates and constraints to
build the complete assembly. Autodisk inventor provides
a complete content library. We'll take a look at
the vast collection of premade standardized
parts and learn how we can insert them
into our assemblies to streamline our workflow. We'll then explore
how we can pattern parts within assembly files, focusing on both linear
and circular patterns. On top of that, we'll
study how to create cross sectional
views to visualize and analyze parts
that may otherwise be difficult to see
within an assembly. Then we'll learn how
to toggle and adjust the visibility and
transparency of individual parts or
subassemblies to improve clarity and focus
during assembly design. Finally, we'll cover how to
edit existing assemblies, including modifying constraints,
repositioning parts, and making any
necessary adjustments to achieve the desired result. Section five focuses on creating two D
engineering drawings. We will begin by reviewing
the default templates available and how we can
open and customize them, such as adding new sheets and
defining border controls. Using the bearing block assembly modeled in the previous section, we will insert a base view. We'll project additional
views from that, and we'll also create
sectional views as well. The process will also cover
how to switch between first and third angle projections
within two D drawings. For each view, whether
base or projected, we will learn how to
adjust the styles, add labels, and include
essential information. Following this, we'll
learn how to insert dimensions and modifying
their related styles. Once the dimensions are added, I will demonstrate how to apply linear and
angular tolerances. For assembly sheets, we will cover how to add a
parts list and use identification
balloons to correlate parts with the parts list
and any relevant details. This section will also include a complete example
of a generated two D engineering drawing with a bearing block assembly
modeled earlier. And finally, I will
guide you through how to create a
custom title block. While we will
initially work with default title box and templates, you will learn how to
design your own tailored to your company client or
academic requirements. In Section six, we'll explore some additional
content that's not necessarily required for
additional assignments, but useful for understanding
the software better. We'll start with an example of modeling a spring using
the coil command, followed by loft modeling based on geometries
and features. And next, we'll learn how to
split bodies within apart, which is a handy tool for
creating separate bodies. And finally, I'll provide
a 30 minute overview of Audodsk inventor and
a 15 minute summary of two D drawing creation, both designed to be easy to follow based on
earlier sections. In Section seven, this includes several practice and
modeling examples. This section
demonstrates creating parts using the techniques
learned in this course. I recommend attempting
these models yourself when given
the dimensions at the start of each lecture. If you prefer, you can watch
the full video to see how we would typically
model these parts with the tools that are
taught in this course. Overall, this course provides a clear and logical overview and structure for learning
autodisk inventor for professional purposes. Upon completion, you will
reach an intermediate level. You will be capable of
sketching, modeling, assembling, and creating two D
engineering drawings to professional standards. If you have any questions
throughout the course, please feel free to contact me. I wish you all the
best of luck in your future endeavors
in CAD design, and I look forward
to seeing you in the course. Welcome to the team.
3. Section Introduction - Homescreen, Projects and Templates: In the very first section, we'll be taking a look at
the home screen interface. So we'll be understanding more about what's presented to us and what options we can do as soon as we open up
Autodesk inventor. We'll then be taking
a look at projects, so how we can create
and modify these, and we'll also be creating our first project that we'll be using throughout this course. Then we will move
on to templates. So where we click New
and we start a new part, an assembly or a drawing, we'll take a look at where
these templates are and how we can choose an according one suited to what we're doing. So a nice introductory
section to begin with, before we move on to
the next section, which is about part files and two dimensional sketching.
I'll see you shortly.
4. Homescreen Interface: In this lecture, we
will take a look at the home screen interface. So when we open up
Autodesk Inventor, you'll be presented with
this home screen here. So in the very center, we have the recent files. So right now, if you haven't
used Inventor before, you won't have any
parts displaying. But when you do work
more with inventor, you'll see your parts
start to appear here. These always correlate to the project that
you're working on. And we can control
projects just up here, but we'll take a look
at that in a bit. When we do have
parts, assemblies, drawings, and so forth
in this area here, we can change how
they're viewed, so we can look at a list view, we can see the according
details there. Or for me personally, I like
to have them in grid view, and I can actually see
firsthand what these parts, drawings and assemblies are. Can also choose to
pin these if we want. So when we do have a
lot of parts, okay, let's say it's on a
particular project with tens or hundreds of parts, we can use the pin icon here. So if we left click this, you'll see it then
gets pinned, okay? And then anything which
we don't want to pin, we can click Remove unpinned
and that will remove any of perhaps the
excess parts that we don't necessarily want to
see on the home screen. Okay? And we can left
click to unpin that. We can also sort them by
categories such as here, so name, date modified, and so forth. A lot
to choose from. I generally just have them
sorted by last opened. And on the right hand side, if we do have many parts here, we can just do a search in here, just to quickly find them. We can also filter
these as well. So, for example, if we're working on them in
the last seven days or the last month or we want to see everything under a particular project for the
last three months, we can also sort as well by parts assemblies and drawings. On the left hand side,
at the very top here, we have our selection
of projects. So I'm currently under one of the projects I've
entitled udomCurse. Okay? But if we open
up this drop down, we can see there I've got quite an array of projects there relating to different projects that I've been working
on and so forth. I would always recommend for any project you're
working on to create a new project and have a project solely or whatever it is
that you're working on. And in the next lecture,
we will be looking at how to create a project, okay? So we'll be entitling this,
you know, something like, udomi course studies or a private study of Autodesk inventor,
something like that. We'll look at that
in the next lecture. We've also got the option
here to open existing parts. So if you click open,
we can then run through our entire PC, looking for an
according part to open, and we can also
select new, as well. So this is where we would create a new art assembly or a drawing, and we would choose a
suitable template for that, which we'll be covering
also in another lecture. And at the very top, we do
have a selection of tools. I rarely use these, might be using the
application options, but do note that the
application options are also available
to us in parts, assemblies, and
drawings and so forth. So at any point when
we're using inventor, regardless of the file
type we're working on, we can come back
to these options here and make any according
edits that we need. So we won't go through
these just yet, but we will be going
through quite a few of these tabs later on
throughout this course. That is an overview
of the homescreen. It's very user friendly
and we'll be using this time and time again
throughout this course. I'll see you in
the next lecture.
5. Create your first Project: In this lecture, we will
create a new project, and this will be the
project that I recommend that you work in throughout
the remainder of this course. Therefore, it will keep all of your file types
under one project. So that's all your parts, all of our assemblies
that we do, all of the drawings, and any of the practice drawings that
you choose to do as well. So to do this,
we're going to come over to where our
projects are listed, and we're going to
select the three dots here and then select settings. Now here, if you haven't
used inventor before, you should just have the default
project available, okay? You can work in
that if you want, but I would recommend
creating a new one, and I'll show you how to do so. So if we come to
the very bottom, we're going to select new. We've got the option there
for a new single user project and a new vault project. So this we're going to select a new single user project, okay? So this will just be you
working on this individually. But next, then we can
name the project. Let's go for Inventor
2025 studies. And then you can select
the location for that. So if you click these
three dots here, you then find a
suitable location of where you want for this
project to be stored, and then all of your parts, assemblies and such will be stored under that same location. Therefore, everything
is stored under this project in one
central location. Once you've chosen your
location, click next. Okay, and then click Finish. And there we will see that we
have a new project pop up, which is Inventor 2025 studies. Now, we can remove any
one of these projects. For example, I choose the Ford Everest project,
we can right click. We can rename it, browse new, and we can delete it as well. So if you need to do
that in the future, that option is available there. The bottom here, it's quite
a lot of information. I recommend leaving everything there as the default, okay? So the type, location, also the appearance libraries, definitely keep those the same. We'll be using these
in later lectures. Same with the
materials libraries. Keep those as they are. Okay, workspace, and
the folder options, templates, keep everything
as the default. That's all we'll be
needing for this course. Once we're finished,
if you click Done, and then now you can see that my home screen interface no
longer has any parts here. And that's because we've
created this new project, and so anything that I create within this project will
then be shown here. But for the purposes
of this course, I'm going to be staying with my project entitled
Edomi Course. Okay, so that's an
overview of how to create a project
nice and simple, and I'll see you in
the next lecture.
6. Templates, Units (Metric/Imperial): Throughout this course, we'll
be opening up new parts, assemblies, and also
drawing templates as well. I want to show you
how to do that here. Now, there are two ways
in which we can do this. So from the home
screen interface, we can just click on New, and then we have a series
of templates here, which I'll go through shortly. Another option to do this is
to come up to the top left, and we have the New up
here or the shortcut on the keyboard control n.
So in future lectures, when I'm working on
parts and assemblies, you'll see me just clicking
on New in the top left here. It's easy to access. But if I'm working from the homescreen, I generally click New here, but both of those do
exactly the same thing. When we open up new, we are then presented with a series of templates
which we can choose from. Now, these are categorized. So, for example, we have
part templates here, assembly templates, drawing
templates, and so on. If we come over to the left, we can see here we have
a series of folders. So if we go with English, for example, all of these
templates here are in inches. So we can see there the standard part template is in inches. And if we come over to the left, we can see it part
template units inches. But the same for assemblies
and the same for drawings. And if we come over to metric, we can then see in the
standard part file, we're in millimeters, and
we can later confirm that. We can see it's part file
and the units millimeters. So throughout this course, I'm going to be working
in millimeters. I would recommend that you
follow and do the same. So when we come under, let's
say the part templates. So we always start with parts. We then build assemblies, and then last, we do drawings. Under the parts, you'll see
here under the metric folder, we got four options. We have four different
templates to choose from. Okay? So we've got two
sheet metal options, and we've got two
standard options. Throughout this course,
I'll be working in the standard
millimeter template. And whenever I
create a new part, you'll see me select this
one and then click Create. So I'll see you in the
next few lectures where we will be opening
up part templates.
7. Section Introduction - Part Files & Sketching : In this section,
we will learn all about part files and
two D sketching. Sketching is fundamental
to three D modeling, and inventor provides many
sketch tools that enable us to construct high quality sketches to the later three D model. We'll start with customizing the interface appearance to create a more user
friendly environment, followed by working
our way through the broad range of
creation tools, modification tools,
pattern tools, and also the constraint tools. On completion of this section, you will have the
skill set to sketch fairly complex geometries before we move on to the next section, which is three D modeling. Each lecture is
presented step by step, and I will walk you
through how we can use these sketch tools
for common practices. I'll be giving a range of examples throughout
the lectures, which I would recommend that you follow along with and take the opportunity to practice these tools and familiarize yourself with what they can do. In the following
sections of this course, I'll be regularly
using these tools covered in this section,
and so will you. So to start with, let's
open a new part file. So we've opened up
AutoDesk Inventor. We're presented
with a home screen. Let's come over to
New. Let's come under our part templates, and let's select the standard
millimeters template. That's located under
the metric folder. Once we've clicked that,
let's click Create. And I'll see you in
the next lecture.
8. Part Files & User Interface: In this section,
we will learn all about part files and
two D sketching. Sketching is fundamental
to three D modeling, and inventor provides many
sketch tools that enable us to construct high quality sketches to the later three D model. We'll start with customizing the interface appearance to create a more user
friendly environment, followed by working
our way through the broad range of
creation tools, modification tools,
pattern tools, and also the constraint tools. On completion of this section, you will have the
skill set to sketch fairly complex geometries before we move on to the next section, which is three D modeling. Each lecture is
presented step by step, and I will walk you
through how we can use these sketch tools
for common practices. I'll be giving a range of examples throughout
the lectures, which I would recommend that you follow along with and take the opportunity to practice these tools and familiarize yourself with what they can do. In the following
sections of this course, I'll be regularly
using these tools covered in this section,
and so will you. So to start with, let's
open a new part file. So we've opened up
AutoDesk Inventor. We're presented
with a home screen. Let's come over to
New. Let's come under our part templates, and let's select the standard
millimeters template. That's located under
the metric folder. Once we've clicked that,
let's click Create. And I'll see you in
the next lecture.
9. Colours & Background Customization: Before we begin
sketching and modeling, let's take a look at
how we can customize our workspace to suit
our preferences. So in this example, the canvas that we're looking at
is white in color, and the user interface
theme is a light setting. We can change these
by coming into the tab called tools here, and then select
application options. This window gives an array of tabs to which we can
select our preferences. In this section,
we'll only focus on the colors tab,
which is just here. Now, the options that
we have down here is to change the user
interface theme. So right now, I've got it
under a light setting. We can change that
to a dark, okay? So if I click Apply. For me, personally, I prefer the
dark user interface theme. Moving on, we have the
in Canvas color scheme. So if we scroll down. So right now, I've got presentation color
scheme selected, and the background
is just one color. So it's just a single
color white, in this case. I can change that to a gradient. Then if I click Apply,
we can see we're getting a gradient from more of a darker color
to a lighter color. And we can do the same
for any of these. So quite a popular
one is high contrast. If we just go on one
color, just black, and then if we
change to gradient, we go from a dark gray
over to a light gray. My preference here
is presentation and gradient, which
is this one here. Now you've also
got the option to add your own background image. So if we select this,
we can then select here an image that we
want as the background. Okay, so for example, if I select sky sun two, click Okay. Apply. We then got
that as a background. So feel free to choose any images that you have
on your PC that you like. But for me, as I say, I'll go with presentation and gradient. So here we have this nice
gradient canvas color, which is subtle and
easy to work with, in my opinion, I'll be using this option
throughout the course.
10. Start Sketching - Planes & Common Tools: Now that we've customized
the interface and the Canvas scheme,
let's start sketching. Sketching is an essential step in creating any part or model. There are a wide variety of
tools available in sketching, and the more you sketch, the more you'll become familiar with these and able to create
more complex geometries. In this lecture, we
will take a look at the three default planes, and also we'll do
some basic sketches using the line tool.
So let's begin. If we come up to the top
left where the tabs are, there are two tabs here, three D model and sketch. We can select either
one of those, and both of those
will present us with start two D sketch, or we can press S
on the keyboard. So if we left click
and select that, we can now see that there
are three planes here, the XY plane, Y Z plane, and the X Z plane. Now, these are two
dimensional planes to which we sketch on before we
start three D modeling. We won't go into detail now in how to choose one of these, but the more you start
sketching and modeling, the more that you will
become accustomed to selecting the correct one. For the purposes
of this lecture, let's select the XY plane. If we left click there, and now we are looking
perpendicularly at that plane, and we can begin sketching
in this environment. Inventor has automatically
opened up the sketch tab, and at the very top
here, we can see a wide array of tools
available to us. Might seem a bit intimidating
at first, but don't worry. We're going to break these down and go through
each of them. Now note that they are
broken up into sections. So we've got the
create tools, okay? So line, circle, arc, rectangle, and so forth. They got the modify tools here, the pattern tools, constraints, and also dimension there. So I'll cover modify pattern and constrain in
different lectures, and then in the
next few lectures, we'll be focusing on
the main tools here, which are the creation tools. Let's take a look
at the line tool. So if we come under line, you'll notice
there's a drop down, and if we select that, we've got some different
options there. So we've got the
generic line, midpoint. We've also got
splines and curves. So splines and curves are used for more
complex geometries, we won't be focusing on
those in this lecture. But let's take a look at
line and midpoint line. So if we select the line tool, remember we're looking
at the XY plane. Bring the mouse over to
the working environment, and you'll see this
yellow.in the middle. So that's called the origin or sometimes called the
center point. Okay? So on the axis
system, that is 000. And then if we left click
on the center there, so we should snap to it, we'll see that turns into
a green circle. Then if we move
the mouse around, we can start to draw a line. If we notice there are
two dimensions here. One is a linear dimension, so currently 8.515 millimeter, and the other is an angle, and that's to the horizontal
line. You can see there. First of all, let's
apply a dimension. So let's apply a dimension of 15 millimeters to the linear, and then we're going to
hit tab on the keyboard, and then we'll come
over to the angle. So on the angle, let's
select 30 degrees. Then if we press Enter, we can now see that we have
this straight line with a 15 millimeters in length and a 30 degree angle to this
horizontal line here. Now we can continue
drawing lines. So if we keep left clicking, we can draw as many
lines as we like. If we want to exit the tool, we can right click and select. Okay. I'm going to select these lines here
that we don't need, and then I'm going
to hit Delete on the keyboard. We
can remove those. If we want to move these
dimensions around, we can hold down the
left mouse button, we can move those so we can see them maybe a
bit more clearly. And if we want to edit these, it's very simple,
double left click, and then we can input
the dimension we like. Let's go 18 millimeters there. Let's change this
angle to, let's say, 45 plus enter we can make
the modifications like so. So that's the basics of
the generic line tool. So if you want to
move if you want to pan around the axis, there
are two ways to do this. We can select the pan just
on the left hand side there, then we can left click
and move around, or we can hold down the
middle mouse button, and we can do exactly the same. So I'm just going to
pan over here slightly, and then I'm going to
select the midpoint line. Select that. And then if I click
anywhere in the canvas, let's just say here, you'll see, I've started at the midpoint, and now as I move the mouse, I can create the length of that. And again, I can input an
option here for the length. In this case, let's
just about 20 millimeters, press Okay. Then I'll right click and
select Okay to leave that. So that's a quick
introduction to the line and the
midpoint line tool. These are used very commonly
throughout sketching, so they're kind of fundamental, but they are very simple to use. I'll see you in
the next lecture.
11. Circle Tools: And let's move on to
the circle tools. So if we select the drop down, we've got the
centerpoint circle, which is the most commonly used. Then got the tangent circle
and also the ellipse. So ellipse is more used
for complex geometries. Start by taking a look at
the centerpoint circle. So first, I'm going to hold down the middle mouse button and just pan over to
some empty canvas. I'm going to left click
anywhere in the canvas, and you'll see we're
beginning to draw a circle, and we can adjust the
diameter by moving the mouse. Center a dimension there of 20 millimeters I'll select okay, there we have our 20
mill diameter circle. Now, we're still in
the circle tool. You can see it's selected. So if we left click here, we can draw more circles
as many as we need. We want to leave
the tool. Again, we right click Select Okay. Remove these three circles. We can just press Control
Z on the keyboard, remove these three like so. If we want to adjust
this dimension, just like the line tool,
we can double click. Let's go for 18 millimeters,
reduce that slightly. Now we have an 18
mill diameter circle. I'm going to pan across again. I'm going to show you this
time, the tangent circle. So to do this, I want
to have three lines. So I'm going to
select the line tool, draw in one line, right click. Okay. Raw in another
line, and one more. Let's go for this one. Now let's go on the tangent circle. So we have these three lines. We're going to select
one, two, and three. And you'll see that inventor will recognize the
positioning of these three lines
and draw a circle according to what makes it tangential to those three lines. There's more used for
more complex drawings. The right click
Okay, to leave that. And we're going to pan across
to some empty canvas here. And now we're going to
use the ellipse tool. Okay? So if we come across
anywhere on the canvas, first of all, we start
with the center. I'm going to select
the center being here, and then we're drawing
out an axis point. So in this case, I'm
going to left click here. Okay? And then I can
draw my ellipse like so. It's more commonly
used when there are lines and other positioning
tools in place to ensure that we get an
accurate positioning and dimension of an
ellipse that's needed. Okay, so those are the three circle tools that
I've just showed you there, centerpoint circle,
tangent, and ellipse. But again, the most
common one we'll ever need is the
centerpoint circle.
12. Arc Tools: So far, we've taken a look at the basic line tools and
also the basic circle tools. Now let's move on to the arcs. So we've got three options
here, the three point arc, which is the most
common that I use, tangent arc and
center point arc. Now, all three of these
have their own uses. Let's take a look at the three
point arc to begin with. I'm going to be
using my sketches, I've already drawn here to support me in
demonstrating these. So the first point we must define is the start of the arc. So I'm going to snap to
the end of this line here, and then I need to define the end of the arc, in
which case, it is here. And then you can see
I've got an option to control the
radius of the arc. I can control that by
entering a number, or I can just left click and
place in the arc like so. That's the basic principles
behind the three point arc. A tangent arc is basically
an arc that becomes tangent to point to
which you define. So a start point, let's
say this one here. Now, wherever I draw this arc, we can see it is tangential
to this point here. I I drop that here, right click. Okay, we can see that joining
point there is tangential. So those are the principles
behind the tangential arc. And then moving
across, let's take a look at the center point arc. Very straightforward to use. First of all, we need
to define the center. So if we select the center
at this junction here, and then we come out
and we can select the starting point of
the arc, let's say here. And then wherever we
move the mouse to, we can see the arc forming. If you want to end
the arc here or here, so let's go over here. And so those are the principles
of the three arc tools. Again, most common is a three point arc very
straightforward to use. Okay, let's jump into
the next lecture where we'll take a look
at the rectangle tools, the slots, and polygons.
13. Rectangles, Slots & Polygons: In this lecture, we'll cover
the key rectangle tools, the slot tools, and
also the polygon tool. So first of all,
let's take a look at the rectangle tools. We've got four to select from. The most common
two that I use are the two point rectangle and the two point center rectangle. We'll run through all
four just so that you understand the
principles behind each one. Let's start with the
two point rectangle. A straightforward. One click starts at one corner, and another click will
start at another corner. So it's typically at this point that I actually
enter dimensions. So let's say 15 by
ten and press Enter, and there we have our two point rectangle
very straightforward. Next, we have the
three point rectangle. So a little bit
more advanced here, so we select our first point, and then we have the
option to input an angle. Let me put in a dimension there. So we'll do a linear
dimension of 20, press tab on the keyboard. We'll do an angle of,
let's say, 15 degrees, press Enter, and then we
need to do one more click, which is the third corner. So we need to define
where that is. This, I'll put in a dimension
of let's say 8 millimeters, and there we have all of
the dimensions there, and we can control this angle. So if we double click, we can change that to let's say 25, change that width, 15, and change the height,
a six, like so. So a bit more capability and offerings in this tool compared to the two point rectangle. Moving on, let's take a look at the two point center rectangle. Again, I use this
quite commonly, the very first click is the
very center of the rectangle. And then when we
drag out the mouse, we can then see that the
rectangle shape forms, and we can input
dimensions there. So typically, here,
I'd add my dimensions. Let's say, 25 and
ten press Enter. So yeah, very
straightforward tool. Next up, we have the three
point center rectangle, which is a bit more advanced on top of the two point
center rectangle. So we click, and that is our center point
of the rectangle. And then we need to provide
some dimensions here. So I'm going to input 20 to an angle 15 degrees press Enter. And then, as you
can expect here, we can then define the height. In this case, I'll enter six, and we can adjust
all these dimensions accordingly, like so. So those are the four
rectangle tools there. Two point rectangle,
three point rectangle, two point center, and
the three point center. Next, let's move on
to the slot tools. The very first slot tool we
have is center to center. Very straightforward. It's like the bread and butter
of slot tools. The first point
defines one center, and then the second point
defines another center. So I'll just put in a
dimension there of 20, and then we need to define
the diameter of the arc. So in this case, I'm just
going to put 8 millimeters. There we have our slot, all
the according dimensions to which we can then
adjust as necessary. For example, I make
that six, the 20. Let's bring that down to 16. So descender slot
very straightforward. Now we've got the overall slot. So this is slightly different. I'm going to do here
to demonstrate this is to snap to this line here, then drag that across and
snap to this line here. And then I'm going to
input my diameter. Let's go to six mil again. And so what we can
see here is I've come from I've done an overall slot. So I've come from the outer
quadrant of this arc to the outer quadrant of
this arc as opposed to a center of this arc to
a center of this arc. A very similar principle. Output is slightly different based on where you're starting. Next tool we've got is the slot, which is a center point. All right. So here,
instead of starting, we're not starting at
the center of an arc. We're not starting at
the outer quadrant, but instead we're starting
at the very center. So to demonstrate
this, we'll do our first click where the
center should be, and then we'll come out to where the center
point of the arc is. And then let's add in a
diameter there of six milo, so we've achieved
the same result there by using a different tool. The next slot is a
three point arc. I'm going to come
over here for this. So first of all, we need to
define the center of the arc. Okay, so one click there, and then the end of the arc. To some dimensions
here, so I go for 12. I'll press tab on
the keyboard and put it in an angle
of ten degrees. Okay. Now I need
to define my arc. So I'm going to give that a
radius, say 10 millimeters. Okay? So we've got our arc, and now when we move the mouse, we can see the slot
forming about that. I need to put in
a diameter there. So, in which case, I'll
put in 5 millimeters, and we've got all those
dimensions there. Tidy that up a little bit. There we go. And then next, we've got the center
point arc slot. So very similar principle, but instead here we start at
the center of the arc, okay? So I'm going to draw
that out like so, right? Then put in my arc. I can put in an angle there, let's say 45 degrees, and then I can draw my slot based around that arc
there, a four mill. And again, just like the other tools we've
been playing with, you can adjust these
dimensions as you need. For example, I'll change
that too, let's say 60. Okay, I could change
that to say three. And last but
certainly not least, we have the polygon tool. So let's go into our drop
down and select polygon, and then we have this
toolbox pop up here. I just pan across a little bit. So we have an option for
inscribed and circumscribed. So I always go for inscribed and then make my
dimensions from there. Here we select the
number of sides. So we go for six side.
So in this case, a hex. And to begin with, we just select the center
of the polygon, and then as you move your mouse, you'll see the hex to
pop out from that, okay? So we can just put that
in there, a right click. Okay. Let's select that
tool one more time. In this case, let's put
in a 12 sided polygon. Alright. And then we can see our polygon so and click Done. And then from here, as I said, I normally put in dimensions. So I haven't covered this yet, but I will cover this
in a later lecture. Here we have the dimension tool, which comes under
the constrained tab. Okay? So if we select dimension, we can do a dimension from
the flats of this hex. Okay? So let's say
that's eight mil. Let's say from this flat this flat here of
the 12 sided polygon. Let's put that as 12 mil. Right click. Okay,
that's our polygon tool. Okay, so that covers
it for the polygons. We've done the slots here. We've also taken a look at the four variants of
the rectangle tool. I hope that all makes sense, and we'll be using these tools in the exercises to come up
at the end of this chapter. So I will see you in
the next lecture.
14. Fillets & Chamfers: In this lecture, we will study the fillet and the hamper
tool in sketch mode. So I'm going to come up and I'm going to select a rectangle. This time, I'm going to
select a two point rectangle, start at the origin,
bring that out. I'll enter some dimensions in. So we'll do a width
of 15 millimeters, press tab on the keyboard. We'll do a total
height, let's say, 10 millimeters, press
Enter. Right click. Okay. Center that. We can use the middle mouse
button to zoom in and out. Now if we come up
to the fillet tool, we'll select that,
and then we need to input the fillet dimension. So in this case, let's
go with 4 millimeters. We need to select two entities to which a fillet
will be formed. So the first entity
is this line here, and the second entity
is this line here. Now, as soon as we
hover over that, we can see a preview
of the arc form, the same with this entity here. So that arc is forming there. Going to select this line
here. Okay, that's good. Then going to exit out of
the fillet tool. I like so. And there we have our
four mill fillet. So, likewise, let's do
that for the other corner. Let's put a fillet on
there 1 millimeter, select the first
entity and the second, exit the fillet
tool, and there we have our one mil fillet. A very similar tool to
use, very effective. There is also an option to fill it in three D mode as well, which we will cover in the next section on
three D modeling. But it's really
down to preference whether you do this in sketch. I typically do it in
three D modeling mode. But again, this is
something that we can always do in
sketch mode as well. And the next to I want to
show you is the hamper. So if we click on the drop down, we've got the ShampaTol here. Let's select that. Then
we've got our options here. So here we've got
different options. We can do an equal hamper. So let's say we do
a two mill hamper. I'll select this entity
and this one here, we can see move
those dimensions. You can see we've got
our two mill dimension here and a two mill
dimension here. Now, if we look at
this dimension, there is a function
at the beginning, so FX colon two, it's relating to something, and it's relating to dimension seven, which is this one here. If we double click on
that, it's called D seven. And so if we change this, let's say, let's change
it to 3 millimeters, we'll see that this dimension
will change already because that relationship is there between these
two dimensions. And that's because
it's an equal ShamFa. Now if we select
the two D ShampaTol and then we click
this option here, we've then got options to
put in different distances. So let's say the first distance, it's 1 millimeter
and the second, let's go with three, make that
visually quite different. So select our first
entity and the second. It's okay. And then those dimensions will
pop in here, right? So we've got our three
mill on the vertical, and then we've got our one
mill on the horizontal. And for the last champa option, I'm just going to pan over here, draw in another rectangle
do the same dimensions. Select the ShamfTol again, and then we're going to
select the third option here. So let's say a distance
of, let's say, 4 millimeters, and let's
put an angle of 20 mil. So here we're not
actually defining what the distance will be, but instead, we're
defining angle. So let's select first entity and the second
entity. It's okay. Then we've got our
distance here, so four mil on the vertical, and then inventor has input the angle for us,
so 20 millimeters. And again, we can change
this, let's say, 45, okay? So that would be an equal
champ so four to four. Let's go with, let's go with 15. Okay, so these are
different options there for hampers that we can use as we begin to progress with our sketching capabilities. That's it for the Fillet and the hamper tool quite
straightforward. And I will see you
in the next lecture.
15. Text Tools: In this lecture,
we'll be learning how to use the text tool. So I've got two examples here
of where I have used text. Down here, I've used text to emboss some lettering
onto a surface. Now, it can be used to
emboss lettering or numbers, let's say, a part number
or a model or a brand. So here I've got inventor. Okay. And then at the top, I've used letters to
engrave into a surface. So here we can see I actually
engraved into that surface. And then if we move down, we can see I've embossed
onto that surface there. So in this lecture,
we'll just be learning how to
use the text tool, how to modify the text, and how to make it conform to geometries prior to
three D modeling, which we will be covering in the three D modeling section. So I'm going to
start a new part. We'll come up to the
top left, select new. I choose a standard
millimeters template again, create come on to
start a two D sketch. In this case, I'll
select the XY plane. And then very simply,
I'm just going to hit the text option here. That's a shortcut
T on the keyboard. Left click the mouse, then
we can enter our text here. Enter inventor for now. And then we have a myriad
of options that we can play with to
customize our text. These are very standard
options that you would get, for example, in office software. But this here, I'm
going to stay with this font and choose
6 millimeters. And then if you want
to re edit that text, we can just double click on it. You can also add bullet
points, numbers, justification to left center or right positioning up,
middle or bottom. Yeah, make it bold, change
the color, and so forth. Feel free to have a
play around with these. If at any point you do want
to enter any symbols in here, that's an option that
we do have as well. So I typically do
this in drawings. But if we do ever want to do it when sketching or modeling, we can just select
the drop down here, and then we have, let's say, the tolerance symbol
plus or minus degrees diameter
and so forth there. Okay, so let's say
with inventor, okay? And there is one more text
tool which I like to show you. So this is if we go
on the drop down, it's called geometry text. Now this is where we
conform text to a geometry. I'm going to give
an example here. Let's choose the line tool, and I'm just going to
draw a line anywhere. Let's give that a length
of Let's go for 50, and let's just say 25 move
that dimension out the way. And then we'll come
into the dropdown, and we'll select geometry text. Now, from here, all we need
to do is to select a entity. So in that case,
is this line here, or left click Enter my text. Press ok. And now we can see that the text is now
sitting on this line. If we want to move
this text, though, we cannot just hold down the left mouse
button and drag it. But what we can do
is double click, select it, and then we
can center justify it. Press Okay. And now it's sitting in the
center of the line. And likewise, if you want to write justify it, we can do so. We can also change the
direction of the text, as well. Se press Okay. We can now
see that change direction. It's like it's inverted.
And this is very useful if we're doing plastic
injection molded parts. Double click on that again, put that direction
back to how it was. We can also change
the offset distance. So if we want to offset
this from this entity here, let's say we do that let's
say 2 millimeters plus enter, we can now see that it
sits off of this line, so it's offset by a
total of 2 millimeters. We can also make
various changes to the text itself by clicking
the launch text editor, and there we have the
same options that we had when we've just
done normal text. So we can make any
changes or formats there, select Okay. And there we go. That's how we conform text
to a particular geometry. So that's a summary
of the text tool, nice and easy to use, and we'll be using
this later when we come on to the three
D modeling section. I'll see you in
the next lecture.
16. Modify Tools: In this lecture, we
will take a look at the modify sketch tools. So I'm going to
start a new part. I'm going to select the
standard millimeters template, but create now let's
start two D sketch. An of our three default planes, let's go with the XY plane. So the modified tools
are just up here. There are nine key tools. Let's take a look
at these today. So first of all, I'm going
to draw some geometry. I'll start with a
centerpoint circle. And I'm just going to start
anywhere in the environment, let's say here, and I'll draw
that out, and I'll enter. Let's go with 10 millimeters. That's diameter. Let's enter. Now we have this ten mil circle. Let's first of all, take
a look at the move tool. There are different ways in which we can move this circle. We can use the move tool, and there's a shortcut that
I show you afterwards. So if we want to move
this, first of all, we need to select the
geometry to move. I'm just going to left click
drag around the circle, let go of that, and then we need to select
the base point. So the base point
is from where we move the circle to
where it's going to go. So, for example, if I select the center
point of the circle, and you can now see that
where I left click will be the final destination of that circle according
to that base point. So in this case,
I'm just going to move this to the origin, which is the yellow.in
the center there. So that's 000 on
the X Y and Z axis. I'll left click once, and
there we've moved the circle. We have a few more
options here to copy. Okay? So I select this, select my circle, use the
same basepoint again. Then if I left click here, you'll see that it's
just copied the circle. I've moved it, and
I've copied it also. We can also use
precision input, right? So if I select this circle here, I go base point, I
select the center point. I like precise input. I can then input a
precision point. So for example, if I
want to go across, let's say we go across on
the X axis by ten mil, tap on the keyboard,
on the Y axis, let's say we go minus ten. We can then see that
precise point there. Another way in which
we can move a sketch, which is easier, in my opinion, is just to hold down
the left mouse button. Let's say on the center point of this circle here and let go, and I can just move it like so. But if we do want precision
or anything like that, we'll need to use the move tool. Next, let's take a
look at the copy tool. So quite simply, we're
just going to copy. In this case, let's
go with this circle here or select the base point. Let's again go with the
center point of the circle, and I can left click as
many times as I want. We can have as many of
those circles as we need. We could also have the
option here to clipboard, so Control C. If I select
this and click Done, if I put my mouse in this position here
and press Control V, you'll then see that
I can input a circle, and likewise it's here,
likewise it's here, and we can go on indefinitely. We've also got the option here as well for precision input, so we can use the coordinate
system to accurately input circles where
we need them to be. If we want to remove
any of these circles, we can left click on them and press delete or alternatively, we can just press Control Z on the keyboard, which
is just undo. We can undo all of these copying of the circles
or moving them around. Next, we've got the rotate tool. So for this, I'm not
going to use a circle. We use a different
geometry there. Let's go with a two
point rectangle. I draw in a rectangle. I
put in some dimensions. Let's go with 20 and ten. And if we select
the Rotate tool, we need to select the sketch to rotate or the sketch pieces. Now we can select these
lines individually, so we can left click on each one of the lines we
just highlighted. Or just like before, I'm going to hold down the
left mouse button drag across the entire rectangle
and let go of that. And now highlighted in blue. We can see we've got the
entire rectangle selected. We need to define
a center point, so this is a rotation point to which this rectangle
will turn around. Let's go for this
corner point here. And you might have a
dialogue box pop up, okay? In this case, we want
to click, though, this is just saying that
these horizontal lines are constrained horizontally, okay, so they're
not able to rotate. And also the vertical lines will be constrained vertically. But in this case,
we can just remove the constraints.
There's no issues here. So yeah, around that base point we've selected, we
can then rotate this. And what we can do in this box here highlighted in blue
is to input an angle. I I rotate this by, let's go for 335 degrees, you press Enter, and then we've changed that 335 degree angle. We've also got the option
there for copy as well, and also precision input. In terms of the trim tool, let me draw some lines
to showcase this. I'm going to draw
a straight line across the line tool again
and do a vertical line. Now, where these two
lines intersect, if we no longer want to have this material here
or this material, what we can do is to click trim, and then we can hover
the mouse over the line, and inventor will
recognize the point of intersection and then enable us to trim away this line here. So if we left click,
that gets removed. Other way to do this, as well, especially if we are trimming away quite multiple lines
or quite a few lines, we can hold down the
left mouse button, and then we'll start to see
this blue line form like so, and anything that intersects with that blue line
will be trimmed. So if I come down
here, see immediately that extra line that we didn't need has now
been trimmed away. We've then got the extental
again, very straightforward. To showcase this, let me draw in another vertical line.
Go for this one. Now, if we wanted for this
line to extend to this line, we just select the extental and then if we hover
the mouse over it, we'll see that extension
preview pop in place. And if we left click,
that line is now there. To another example. Let's put a line in here. Want to extend
this to this line, so we just extend
Left click once. There we go. We've
extended those two lines. Now the next tool is split, so it's quite an
interesting tool. So if we draw a circle, I'm just going to
give that a diameter, let's say 15 mil, say we draw a straight
line across that circle. Now, if we wanted to remove this material
here, we could trim it. But if we wanted to split this circle so that
it's split into two arcs that are distinguished by where this
line intersects the circle, we can choose the split command. And then if we select
the circle here, inventor will recognize
the intersection points and we'll split it accordingly. So now if I go ahead
and let's say, I copy I want to copy
this whole circle, if I select this arc here, I can only copy the arc. Here, let's move that
from the center point. And then as we can
see here, I've actually split the geometry. So the whole circle has now
been split into two arcs. And likewise, I could do the same for the other arc, as well. Okay, like is the split command. Next, we have the scale command, so very straightforward to
use. We're just scaling. For this, let's go back to
one of our ten mill circles. So we need to select
the geometry, I'll select the circle, the base point from which
we're scaling from. So in this case, the center
point of the circle. Okay? Just click yes here. And then we can scale this. So we can scale it if we want
it three times the size, so this should be 30
mill enter three, press Enter, and now we've
scaled that by three times. So the diameter is now 30 mill. Likewise, we can shrink Okay, let's shrink that by,
let's do not 0.5. Okay? And then we're down.
We've scaled it by half, and now
we're down to 15. For the stretch command, I rarely use this one, but it can be useful
in some cases. We demonstrate I put in just
put in a rectangle like so. And then if we select
the stretch command, we can choose here
entities to sketch. So, for example,
if I choose these two and then select
the base point, let's say, the corner here, just press yes to
remove any constraints. I can then stretch
these two entities. Okay? So if I left
click once again, we now stretch those according
to the new position. In the last modified tool, and I use this one
a lot, in fact, in the upcoming lectures
throughout this course, the most tools that I use within Modify are offset,
trim, and extend. These are the three tools
that I commonly use and would recommend for anyone learning inventor to master these first. The offset tool, absolutely fantastic and very
simple to use. We just need to select
an entity, in this case, I'll set the circle,
and then we're just going to offset it by
a certain distance. So, for example, if I put in, let's say this
were to be a pipe, I want to put in
some wall thickness. Okay, let's say, let's go
with 1 millimeter offset. Okay, we can now see we've got this dimension pop
up there of one mil. And we can always change that by double clicking on it.
Change that to two. Now we've got a two mill
wall thickness there. So we just use that
by offsetting. We can also offset on
the outside as well, just by dragging the circle out. So offset that by two. Okay, we then got that
dimension pop up there. And again, double left click. We can change that to
one, something like that. So that's a quick overview
of the modified tools. Again, I will be using
these in future lectures, so we'll have more
of an opportunity to experiment with these. I hope that helps, and I'll
see you in the next lecture.
17. Sketch Pattern Tools: In this lecture, we
will learn how to use these sketch pattern tools. So rectangular pattern,
circular pattern, and mirror. So let's go on New,
start a part file, go to go with
standard millimeters. Click Create. Go to
start a two D sketch. And for this, let's
go with the XY plane. But the pan tools are
located just up here. A, rectangular,
circular and mirror. Let's go for a
rectangular pattern. So to demonstrate
this, I'm going to start by drawing in a
two point rectangle. I start at the origin, to bring that across,
and I'm going to enter a dimension here of 150. Then going to hit tab on the keyboard. I can
enter my height. In this case, I'm
going to put 20. Double click middle
mouse button. Hey, bring that to the center. Then from here, I'm
going to add a circle, and I'll begin to pattern this. I'll click the circle tool, I'm going to click anywhere inside my rectangle,
add my circle. Going to give that a
diameter of 5 millimeters. And I'm going to dimension that. So let's position the circle
from this horizontal line. Let's go for five mil. And again, the circle
from the vertical line. Let's also go for five mil. Okay? So that's
fully constrained, as we can see in the bottom
right corner. That's great. Now let's go ahead and
rectangular pattern this circle over our rectangle. So when we have the
toolbox pop up here, we need to define the geometry
which we wish to pattern. But in this case, I'm
just going to drag across my circle,
let go of that. That's highlighted in blue. And then I need to
define my direction, which I want the
pattern to be in. Now, in this case, we
need to select an entity. So I'm going to select this line here so that we mirror
in this direction. Okay, so if I select
that line there, we'll then see a green arrowhead pointing in the other direction, and we see there's been a pattern circle in
the wrong direction. No issues there at all,
because under direction, we can just flip that, and now we're going in the
correct direction. Okay. In terms of the number of circles I'm going to pattern, I'm going to go for 15, and I'm going to spread
these by distance. We could do any
distance you like here. I'm going to go for ten mil. Okay? And as per the
dimensions of this rectangle, that should bring us
nicely to the end. We've got the same
distance over here of five mill and over
here of five mil as well. Now, notice here that we can
also add a second direction. So we've only patterned
in one direction, okay? So down the X axis. That's also pattern down the Y axis as well. I'm going to select
direction two. Now, in this case, I'm going
to select this entity here, and we'll see the
green arrowhead. Is luckily in the right
direction this time, but if not, we could
just flip that. A number of instances, in this case, I'm just
going to select two. Okay If we select
more than that, we'll see we're going
beyond the rectangle, so I only need to have
a pattern of two here. Okay. I'm also going to choose
the same distance there. So 10 millimeters between the two center points
of the circle. I click Okay there, we see the pattern complete,
and that's looking nice. Now, if you want to
edit your pattern, you can do that at any point. You can come across to
any one of these circles. Let's choose this
one. And right click, and then we have some
immediate options here. One of those is Edit pattern. So if we choose that, we can make any according changes here. So we could go for, let's say, if we want to increase
that to five or likewise, we could change the distance
here to, let's say 20. And then we've got
this very large gap of 20 between all of them. Okay, we keep the on ten. That's okay. That's how we
edit a rectangular pattern. Another useful tool as
well as to suppress. It's not commonly used, but on an occasion where
you do need to use it, we can suppress any
circles like this. For example, if I suppress these three and then I
finish the sketch, you'll see that those three
circles have now been suppressed and they're no
longer a part of our sketch. That come back into the sketch, I'll come to the design tree and right click edit the sketch. Just going to right
click on this one again suppress, do that for all three. If you want to
delete the pattern, we can also again,
right click on any one, including the original one, and we can just click
Delete pattern there, and then we're back
to the original. So that's a quick overview
of the rectangular tool. It's very useful and
very simple to use. Just select the geometry
that we want to pattern, and then we select an entity
giving it the direction, and then we input
our distances and how many entities to pattern. But the circular paternt tool, very similar and again, another very easy tool to use. Let's go with another circle. Let's go for a circle of ten mil diameter.
Bring that up there. Now, to use a circular
pattern tool, we need to have an axis
to pattern this around. So for this, I'm just
going to enter a point. I'm going to enter
a point down here, so in line with the
center point here. I'm going to dimension that,
give that a bit of accuracy. Let's got a 20 mil looking good. Select our circular
pattern tool, and just the same thing here. We need to select our geometry
by drag across the circle. And then in terms of the axis, and they're going to select the point that we put in here. And then we've got
some parameters we need to control here. So how many of these circles
we want there to be, we can increase that to ten. We can just go for four. In
this case, let's go for six. Then we can also choose how much of an angle to
pattern these around. So what degrees around the point or our axis?
Will we pattern these? If we go for 180
degrees, for example, we're only patterning
around 180 degrees and six instances. We can also flip the direction. We've got the flip
option there as well. That looks pretty good to me. I'm going to leave
that there for now. Again, if we want to edit this, we can right click Edit pattern, make any according changes, and also just like the
rectangular pattern tool, we can right click and we can suppress any one
of these circles. I I suppress these two for now. And now, the last
pattern tool is mirror. Now, I use this a lot when I'm sketching, really,
really useful. Now, for the mirror tool, we need to have a mirror line. And I'm going to mirror
these circles here. So I'm going to add in a line, go to draw that
anywhere for the time being, right click on that line. I make it a construction line. It's not absolutely necessary that you make it a
construction line, but I like to do so just so that I know it's not
part of any profile, and it's just used for
constructing a sketch. I'm going to make
that a bit more accurate by dimensioning from the centerpoint of this circle
to our mirror line here. Let's go for 15 mil. Okay, right click Okay. Leave the dimension tool. Now let's jump into
the mirror tool. So under the mirror tool, we need to select our
entities to mirror, I'm going to drag across
all of these, select them. I'm going to click
the mirror line, then select our
construction line here. And I'm going to click Apply and done, and that's
looking good. So we can see there
we pattern across our circles and also the
two that we suppressed. And when we click Finish
Sketch, we'll look at that, we can then see
that the circles we suppressed have not
been mirrored, as well. Okay, and that's
the mirror tool. So I will be using
the mirror tool quite a lot in the
upcoming lectures. It's a brilliant
tool, really useful. So that is an overview of the three pan tools
that we have in sketch. Okay? So that's the rectangular
pattern like we did down here, circular pattern
like we did here, and then the mirror, which
is like we did just here. Okay, I hope that all makes
sense. Any questions? Please send them to me,
but aside from that, I will see you in
the next lecture.
18. Dimensions & Constraints: In this lecture, we will learn about dimensions
and constraints. So let's start a new part,
come under the part templates, select standard
millimeters, create. Then we're going to
start a two D sketch. For this, let's go
for the XY plane. And now that we are
under this sketch tab, we've got all our sketch tools, modification tools, got
our pattern tools there. And here we have constraints. Constraints are regularly
used when we're sketching. I think I use them in
every sketch that I do. So let's take a look at these. First of all, we have dimension, very straightforward to use, and you would have
seen me use that in quite a few
previous lectures. We've then got
three options here, so automatic dimensions
and constraints, show constraints. Constraints settings, and then we have the key
constraints themselves. So we've got the coincident, parallel, tangent,
collinear, perpendicular, smooth, concentric,
horizontal, symmetric, fix, vertical, and ecor. Now, that does sound like a lot, but every one of these is
very straightforward to use. I'm going to
demonstrate them now. So let me start
with a line tool. I'm going to start, in this
case, from the origin, and I'm just going
to draw a straight line at an angle like so. First dimension tool, sure you've seen me
use this before. Just select the line itself, and then we can come up and give that a horizontal dimension. Or if we come over to the
left or to the right, we can give it a
height dimension. But what if we want to give
that line a fixed length? Because we're only given an
option here for vertical. That's vertical and horizontal. What we do is we
bring the mouse close to the line and left click once, and then we can see we can
give it a fixed length. If I left click again, let's give that a dimension of 20 mil. Okay, we can do so like that. If I draw another line in, let's go for a horizontal line. I want to give an angle
between these two. Again, I'm going to use
the dimension tool. I'm going to select this
line and this line, and then I'm going to
input my angle here. So let's go let's go 45 degrees. We can move this
dimension around just by holding down the
left mouse button, so we can bring that in or out and we can move
the dimension where we so that's the dimension tool, very straightforward to
use, and I'm sure you'll be using that a lot throughout
the remainder of this course. Let's move on now to the
constraints themselves, so I'll demonstrate
these one by one. First of all, let's
take a look at the coincident constraint. Demonstrate this,
I'm going to draw two lines If we want to have the endpoint
of this vertical line and the endpoint of this
horizontal line to be in contact
with one another, this is when we would use
the coincident constraint. If I select this, I then select the endpoint of this line and
the endpoint of this line, we can see now they are
constrained together, and wherever I move
these entities, you'll see that that
constraint will remain. And we can see
that constraint by left clicking just
on the corner there, and then we see we've got the coincident
constraint applying to the vertical line and then this coincident constraint applying to the horizontal line. We can remove these. So if we left click once and
then right click, we can delete that constraint, and then we can separate
those lines and you'll see, they're no longer constrained. I'm going to put that
back in for now. Another example I'll show
you if I add a circle, let's give that five mil radius. I'm going to use the
coincident constraint here from the center point of the
circle to this line here. Now, if we move this circle,
if we try to move it, you'll see that it's constantly keeping that relationship, that relationship is
maintained between the center point of the
circle and this line here. If you want to fix
this in place, can put the
coincident constraint between the center
point of the circle and let's say the endpoint
of this line here and you'll see that relationship
there is maintained. That's a very commonly
used constraint. You'll see in the
following lectures, and you'll have
plenty of examples where you'll be experimenting
with these constraints, and the coincident
constraint is one that I'll be using
quite regularly. Next, we have the
parallel constraint. To demonstrate this, I
just draw in two lines, any particular angle, so we can see here that these
lines are not parallel. And to change that, select
the parallel constraint, and quite simply, we just
select the two lines. They are now
parallel, and we can see visually the constraint
that has appeared. If we left click this line, we can see that
constraint there. And again, if we right
click Select Delete, I can then change the angle, and they are no longer parallel. If I put that
constraint back in, and then I try to rotate
one of these lines, go for this and I'll
select the rotation point, let's say, the
endpoint of this line. I'll then have a warning
pop up from inventor, so telling me that
there is a constraint already applied that restricts me from rotating this line. So if you want to
remove that constraint, reflect, or otherwise, we
can just leave it as it is. Next, we have the
tangent constraint. This is another very
commonly used constraint. Let's take a look
at this. It's going to use this circle
as an example. I draw in a line, say like so. If I want this line
to be tangential, so roughly in this position
here with the circle, very simply, select
the constraint, circle line, there we see
we've got that constraint. And if we left click
on the circle, we can see that
constraint right there. And likewise, if we
select the line as well. Okay? So that's a
really useful tool. That relationship will
always be in place. Next, we have the
colinear constraint. I'm going to move these
guys out the way. I'm going to draw
in another line. In this case, let's
draw it here. Give that a dimension, ten mil. Now if we select the
colinear constraint, we can make this
line here colinear, in this case, with
this line here. I'm going to select this
line and select this line, and you'll see that
relationship has been formed. And where I move this line, you'll see it will maintain that colinear relationship
between these two lines. Okay? So that's this one here. So again, we can right
click and delete that, then this line is free to move and no longer
colinear constraint. Next, we have the
perpendicular constraint to demonstrate this drawing a
line at an angle like so. If we want this line here to be perpendicular to this
horizontal line, this is when we'll use the
perpendicular constraint. We'll constrain this
line to this line, and you'll see that relationship
has now been formed. So we've got this constant
90 degree angle here. We can then add to that by using the coincident constraint, can select the endpoint of
this line and this line here. Now I see they are in contact. They're constrained
coincidentally. And also on this slide here, we see a perpendicular
constraint with this horizontal line. Next, we have the
smooth constraint. This is only really
used for advanced sketching when
we're using spins. Since we won't be covering
that material in this course, we won't be covering
this constraint. We will be covering the
concentric constraint. Again, you'll see me using this throughout
following lectures. So if I select a circle, let's go for five mil. I'll select another circle, go for ten mil. Right click. Okay. I'm going to use the concentric constraint
between these two circles. I'll select one, select another. And now we can see that
relationship is formed where both of them have a
concentric midpoint. If I try and move this now, regardless of where I move it, those two circles will always remain intact with
that relationship. Next, we have the
horizontal constraint. Let's choose this
slide here actually. If we select the
horizontal constraint, it's very straightforward. Makes an entity horizontal. But this line here is
currently at an angle. If you want it horizontal
along the X axis, just left click on it once, and you'll see it's
now horizontal, and we'll see the
constraint pop up there. We've got the tangent
constraint to the circle. It's looking nice and this line is horizontally
constrained as well. We are unable to change
the angle of this. We can only move it up and down. We have the symmetric
constraint. Draw some more
geometry for this. Let's go for a symmetry line. So I'll give that a
dimension, let's say ten, then come off of
that with an angle, let's say another ten, and
I draw one more line in. Let's go for an angle
like this of ten. So we've got these
two lines here, which have different angles coming from our symmetric line. What we can do here,
symmetric constraint. Now, first of all,
we're going to select the two lines, one line, and then the other line, and then we select the
symmetry line, which in this case, is this one. Now what we see is
the angle between this line and our sentry
line is the equivalent, as is this angle from
this line to this one. Let me just put in some
dimensions to show that, let's say, 30 degrees. And then we can see that
is 30 degrees as well. So if I then change
this dimension, let's say I go for 45, we'll see both lines will
now be at an angle of 45 from our symmetric line. You'll see here the
dimension is in brackets. You might
be questioning that. That's because it's a
reference dimension only, so we cannot control
the angle that's controlled by this dimension here and the
symmetry constraint. This is just here for reference. So let's change
that to 30. Okay? Now both of them are
showing 30 degrees. Next, we have the
fixed constraint or the lock constrain,
as I call it. If we select the join
of these entities here, we are free to move this around. So it's not fixed, not
fully constrained. What we can do is use
the fixed constraint and then select
that point there. We'll see that padlock appear. Okay? And now we'll see that we cannot move any one of these. But this entire sketch is
now fully constrained. All lines have a
linear dimension. They have an angle, and they
have a fixed point here. So nothing here is able to move. Next, we have the vertical
constraint, very simple. Now, the vertical constraint and the horizontal constraint, I'll be using these a lot throughout the
upcoming lectures. You have plenty of experience
to work with them. So you'll have plenty
of opportunity to get hands on with them. For this, I draw a line,
and I draw that line. That's like so exactly
the same process as the horizontal constraint. We just select our
vertical constraint, then select our entity, and then immediately, we
can see that constraint there and that that line is
now constrained vertically. We can change its length. We can move it around, but
we cannot change the angle. And next, we have the
equal constraint. Let me draw in
another line here. I want to dimension
the first line. Let's go to eight mil. If I apply an equal constraint
to these two lines, it will mean that
this line here will become eight mill in length. Let's select this
line, then this line. Now this line here is
eight mill in length, but in the dimension, and we
can see 8 millimeters there. And if I change this,
let's say for 15, we'll see that this line
changes to 15 mil as well. So that traol is then constraining
them so that they are equal let's use a
few more constraints and tidy these two up. Let's go for a horizontal
constraint between the endpoint of this line and
the endpoint of this line. So they are now
horizontally constrained, and we can see that
they are coming to the same position
on the endpoints. Then use the dimension
tool, tidy that up. Let's put in ten more.
Example, I'm going to draw in a circle going
to be ten mil circle, and I'm going to use
the tangent constraint here between this
circle and this line, and then we'll see
there's this tangent constraint with this line here. So that perfectly fits
inside our two lines here. We can also use the horizontal
constraint, for example, from the midpoint of the circle to the midpoint at
this line here. And now that circle
is now constrained. And for the most part,
it's fully constrained. There's just that bit of
movement still available there, which we can change by
adding in a fixed constrain, say, this point here, okay? And now these entities here
are fully constrained. There are three more tools
I'd like to show you, so automatic dimensions
and constraints. Simple to demonstrate.
If I draw, I'm just going to freehand
drawing a triangle. And then if I use the automatic dimensions
and constraints, I can choose to apply
dimensions and constraints. In this case, just for an
example, I choose dimensions. Then if I select my geometry, hold down the left mouse button, drag across, then I click Apply. Then see that this angle
has been put in place and also a distance has
been put in place, as well. That's then fully constraining
this triangle here. That's quite rough
by a free end. We could tidy that
up. Let's go for 60. Another tool is the
show constraints. But if we select this, we
can then select any entity, and it will show us if there are any constraints available. So for example, if I choose
this horizontal line, we'll see a constrain
arise here, which is the
horizontal constraint. So we know this line
is fixed horizontally. Likewise, for the vertical, we see a vertical
constraint there. Let's see what's happening
with the circle. We've got that tangential
constraint, okay? And with this line here, we've
got a vertical constraint, and we've got the equal
constraint as well. Again, we can edit these
anytime just by left clicking, then right clicking,
then press Delete. And now that equal
constraint is no longer there and change the
dimension of this. Let's go for 12 mill. If we want to hide
our constraints, we come down just to
the left down here. The shortcut there is F
nine on the keyboard, hide all constraints. Like so. And then the last tool here
is constrained settings. I'd recommend, at
least for this course, to keep these all
as the default. Typically, when I'm doing
sketching and modeling, I'll leave them as the default, so I'll leave those
as they are for now. So I hope that all makes sense. And again, it might be a bit much to cover
in one lecture, but in following lectures and all the examples we'll
be doing together, we'll be regularly using an array of those
tools to get more of that experience and a
better understanding of when and how to use them. And I'll see you in
the next lecture.
19. Project 1 - Sketching: In the next couple of lectures, we'll be doing a series
of exercises to use the skills that we have learned
in the previous lectures. So this is the very
first exercise. And what I would
recommend here is that you have a go at sketching
this by yourself. And try to use the
following tools, which are the rectangle, circle and slot tool, the Fillet tool, dimension tool, offset tool, constrained tools, and also the mirror tool. So I will now
demonstrate this using the listed tools and you see how I would typically
draw something like this. I'm going to start
a new part going one of standard
millimeters, click Create. Then I'm going to go to Start two D sketch, choose a plane. In this case, I can choose any, but I'll choose the XY plane. And I'm going to
start, first of all with the outer
body of this part. So for this, I'm going
to use a rectangle tool, I use the two point rectangle. I'll start at the origin, and I'll left click just
to form the body itself. Going to use the dimension tool. Okay, I will dimension the
horizontal line first. So that's 80
millimeters in length. That will click the
middle mouse button, zoom out a little bit. And then let's dimension
the vertical length, which is 40 millimeters. Okay. Go to right click
and press Okay to exit. Uh, the dimension tool, and now we're going to add
the fillets on the corners. So for this, we'll
use the Fillet tool, and we can see as
per the drawing that the fillets are five mil. So we'll select our first
entity, and the second, repeat the process
for all four corners, and there we will
have our body with five mill fillets on
each of the corners. Up, let's take a look at
these mounting holes, the three millimeter
diameter ones. All right, so we can see the
position of them is five in from the vertical and
five in from the horizontal. Now, we know that the
fillet is five mil, which must mean that the
three millimeter circle is concentric with the
center point of this arc. Therefore, what we can do
is select the circle tool. Let's just click on one of the arcs center points and then we'll press
three on the keyboard. Okay. And then we have our three mill diameter
mounting hole. We're going to do the same
for the other three, as well. So I'll do the
same for this one. And for the other two, I'm
going to use the mirror tool. So for this, I need to choose
a sketch and then a line, but this will be my mirror line. I'm going to hover above
this horizontal line here until we snap
onto the center point, which we'll see is a green dot. We'll bring that down to the bottom horizontal line and then come across until
we see exactly the same. Sort of center point
there is the green dot. Click once, then
we'll right click. Okay. And we've got
our mirror line. This is for construction
purposes only. We don't want this to be
a part of any profile. So we're going to
right click on this. And we're going to left
click on construction, and then we'll see
it's a dash line indicating that this is
now a construction line, and we can use it
for the mirror tool. So let's select the mirror tool. Okay, bring our box down. But first of all, what
are we selecting? We're going to
select this circle here and also this circle, then we're going to
select the mirror line. So then we select our
construction line, and then we click Apply. And then we see over here, those two circles
have been mirrored, and we've got all four of our three millimeter
mounting holes. Moving on, let's do
the large two circles. So the 20 mil diameter
and the 15 mil diameter. Again, I'll select
the circle tool. And I'm going to draw the
outer first, which is 20 mil. I place that anywhere
inside our body. Right click, rs okay. Now, I want to position this somewhere in
the middle here, we're already snapping on. So to do this accurately, I'm going to use the
constraint tool. So here I use the
horizontal constraint. Like the center
point of the circle. Then I'll come across to
our vertical line here. If I go down, you'll then see we hit the midpoint
of the vertical line. We left click there.
Circle is now constrained horizontally with the midpoint
of this line here. So it's in the
position in this axis. Also, we want to add a
dimension there from this circle to this
vertical wall. In this case, that's
20 millimeters. Okay? Tidy up these
dimensions a little. That's looking good.
And then we've got this inner circle, which is 15 mil diameter. So for this, I'm just going
to use the offset tool. Very simple. Select
my circle there, and I want to offset inside. And so the wall distance there is so it's a
five mil difference. So div about that
two. Let's do 2.5. Okay? And that should give us
a 15 mill diameter circle. Let's just double check that. Yeah, it's coming
out at 15. Perfect. Okay, if we look down
to the bottom right, you'll see that we're
fully constrained. So everything is precisely
where it needs to be, and there are no kind
of missing dimensions there, nothing's going to move. Though looking good so far, we just need to put in the
last feature, which is a slot. And as we can see here, it's dimensioned center to
center is 15 millimeters, and it has a radius of
three mill on the arc. So let's select the
center to center slot. Again, I'm just
going to put this in anywhere. We'll come across. We'll put in the center
to center distance, which is 15 millimeters
plus enter. Draw the mouse out.
And then we need to add this three mil
radius on the arc, but here we're putting
in a diameter. So let's say six milt. Okay, so that's looking good. And again, we've got
complete freedom of this. It can move anywhere,
which we don't want to do. So let's put another
horizontal constrain constrain from the
center of the slot, and let's go to the midpoint
of this vertical line. It's looking good. And then we just need to add in
one more dimension. So click the dimension tool. It's from the center point of this arc to this vertical wall, and that has a dimension of
15 millimeters plus okay. And then that's
all the features. We're just going
to double check. Everything is fully constrained
by looking down here, and again, fully constrained, that's looking good, and that
is the exercise complete. I hope you're able to
follow along, okay. Any questions, please do
post them as a comment, and I will reply
as soon as I can. And I will see you in
the next exercise.
20. Project 2 - Sketching: In this exercise, we will be
sketching this model here. The tools that we'll
be using in this case, are the line circle
and arc tools, also the polygon
tool, the text tool, hamper tool, and of course, we'll be using constraints
and dimensions. So just like the
other exercises, I would recommend that you pause this lecture here and have a
go at doing this yourself, and then following that,
feel free to watch the remainder of this
lecture and see how I would typically draw
something of this. Now, one thing I will say with all these exercises
that I'm hosting here, no necessarily right or
wrong way to sketch, okay? Just because perhaps the way you sketch this would
be different from me, it's not to say that
necessarily that's incorrect. At the end of the
day, we're trying to get to an end result, which is a fully
dimensioned sketch, as we can see here,
and there are many different ways in
which we can do that. Okay, so if I am
to draw this part, I would start with
a two D sketch and I would select a plane. Again, we're only
drawing a sketch, so two D, so we can
select any plane. Let's go with the X
Y. I'm going to start with the line tool at
the bottom right corner. I'm going to come straight
across by 84 mill. And they're going
to go vertical by 60 millimeters come
out of the line tool. And you'll see in
our exercise that we have a Shamp in
this corner here. Going to be using the
ShamfTol to input that. This Samfor is not
a 45 degree Shamfa. It's ten on the vertical
and five on the horizontal. So for this, I
want to be able to select my two distances. The distance one is my ten, distance two is my five. We need to be careful here about which line we click first. If we click the
horizontal line first, it will associate the number ten with that,
which is incorrect. So we want to select the
vertical line first, then follow that and we
can see the preview there. That's correct. Our left
click there. It's okay. Now we've got our ten mil on the vertical of the chamfer and the five mil of the horizontal. Okay, let's come up to the top, and we've got this half
circle here or an arc. To put this in place, I'm going
to be using the arc tool, so three point arc, and I'm going to
start at the endpoint of the vertical line. And I'm going to
bring that across by the diameter in this case. Twice the radius,
in this case is 24. Going to hit tab
on the keyboard, and I want to put
it in a zero there to lock that angle
at zero degrees. Now you'll see we can
input an arc like so. I'm just going to click
anywhere for the time being. We'll click there.
And what I'm going to do is I'm going to tidy
up this dimension first. What we're going to do
is I'm going to use the tangent constraint tool just to mix it up a little bit. Going to select this arc and then this
straight line here. You can see that's
now tangential, and that's looking good. So then we'll select the
line tool and continue. It's come across by 24. Okay, now I want that
to be horizontal, so I have done a slight miss
click there, no issues. I'm going to come up to
the horizontal constraint. I'm going to select
this line here and we'll see that it's
now horizontal. We've also got a hex
in here as well, so that's starting at the
center point of the arc. To do this, we'll come
under our rectangle tools. We've got the slots
and polygons. It is a six sided polygon, and from point to
point is 16 mill. I've got my six sided
selected start there, and I'm just going to drag
that out left left click. Okay? Press done. Now I want to put a horizontal constraint
on this flat here. Okay? So it's in the
correct position, and now we just need to
assign a dimension to that, to give this 16 mill from point to point,
I'll select those two. 16. Then we have
out hex in place. I go to bring this 24 up. Okay, that's looking good. So continuing on here, we then have this angled line, so it's 45 degrees, but a length is not specified. I'll leave that till the
end, and you'll see why. So let's come back to our
starting point at the origin. We'll select the line tool, and we'll continue the
geometries from here. So we come up by 18 mill, we come to the left
horizontal 18, and then up vertical 24. Then quite simply,
we can just come across and we can snap on to
the endpoint of that line. Now I want to ensure that
this is a 45 degree angle. So for this, I'm going to enter
a construction line here, the endpoint here, draw that up. That's vertical. Right
click Construction line. And I'm going to
select dimension, and I'm just going to double
check that this dimension here is 45 degrees,
which we can see it is. Okay, that's perfect. We can then delete that
construction line. Okay, now coming back
to other shampors we see we have a circle
or could be a hole. Okay, so we'll select
the circle tool. And again, we'll just place this anywhere for the time being. It's got a diameter of 12 mil. Roy, that's put its in position. So it's 12 from this wall here, then 12 from this one here. Our circle fully
dimensioned in position. Okay, that's looking good. Just one more thing to add, which is the text up here. Are you a bit of conflict with these dimensions if I move
those out of the way. So for the textal come
the text options, they're going to
select geometry text. So we're going to start with
selecting our geometry, which in this case,
is this arc here. Now, the text is inventor 2025. Okay, not exactly what
we're looking for. First of all, this
is offset slightly. You can apply your own
offset here. It's up to you. I'm going to apply 2
millimeters in this case. Okay, might reduce the
size of that text as well, bring that down to,
let's say, 2.5. Then we only need to worry
about its positioning. So we want this to
shift around the arc. Right now, I've got
it left justified, but I want the start angle
to be slightly offset. So let's go with 45 degrees. Okay, and that's then put the text in the according position. So 45 degrees from here, we then start the text. Okay? So 45 degrees around. We then got inventor 2025. So it's in the correct
position there. Alright, so that's looking good. And then if we look
in the bottom right, we can see it's
fully constrained. Everything is fixed. Nothing
is going to be moving there. That's exactly what we're
looking for. And there we go. So that's typically how I
would draw such a sketch. If you have any
questions on this, please have them in
the comment section. I'll reply as soon as I can. And I'll be seeing you
in the next example.
21. Project 3 - Sketching: In this exercise, we will
sketch this model here. Now, at first, this might look a bit intimidating
with all the arcs, circles, slots, and dimensions. But if we break this down, it's actually quite straightforward. But this model, we'll be using the circle line and
the slot tools. We'll be using the offset tool, the trim tool, and, of course, constraints
and dimensions. So at this point, I would
recommend that you pause the lecture and
have a go at this yourself using the listed tools. Once again, there is no right or wrong way to sketch this model. We just need to achieve
the same final result. So from here on in, I will
begin to sketch this myself. So I'm going to start
this model with the 30 mill diameter circle
in the bottom right. So I'll start a two D sketch. Let's go with the
XY plane again, select the circle tool, start at the origin, expand that out to 30
millimeters diameter. Okay? Zoom out a bit. And I can see there's
this arc around it with a radius of 30
millimeters, okay? There are no sort of
start and end points on this that are
distinguished in the model. So I'm just going to start a circle from the center
point of 30 mill circle. That has a radius of 30 mill, so a diameter of 60
mill. Right click, okay? Now, later on in this model, I will trim away this part of the circle that
we don't need, and that leaves us with
the according arc. Moving on, they're
going to reference the 18 mill diameter circle. So circle tool again. I'm going to just going
to throw that over here 18 millimeters, okay. I can see that that has a
dimension from the center of the circle to the center of these circles of
100 millimeters. Okay. Right click. Okay. And I can also see that the center
point of this circle is horizontally constrained to the center point of
these two circles. So let's once again, select
the horizontal constraint, center of this circle,
center of these two. And now that's in the
correct position, and we are fully constrained. Next up, I'm going
to put in this slot. So for this, I'm going to use
the center point arc slot. Okay? So the very
first point we need to define is the center
point, which is here. I'm going to draw that out. I need to know my radius, which as per the
model here is 60. Then I'm going to press
tab on the keyboard, and I need to put in an angle
to define the start point. We can see that from
the horizontal, which is 180 degrees within ten degrees
in this direction. So 180 minus ten is 170. We defined our
start point there. Now the endpoint is
somewhere up here. So as per the model, the
endpoint is ten degrees plus 100, 110 is okay. Now we've got our start and end center points of this slot. Now we need to
give that a width. So in this case, the
arc is a radius of ten, so that has a width of 20. There we have our
slot in position. I'm going to press right click Okay, to leave the slot tool. And now I can see that
the surrounding arc of this slot has an
offset of five mil. I'm going to select the
offset tool, select my slot. I'm going to bring that out into five on the keyboard, okay? Now I've got my
outer slot there. Now you'll also
notice that we've got a whole slot here,
which we don't need. We will be trimming away this excess material once we have the other
geometries here. Let's go ahead and add these in. So we need an arc from
this arc to this circle. So to do this, I'm
going to choose the circle tool
anywhere over here, go to draw in a circle which has a radius of 60 millimeters. I'll enter 120 on the keyboard. That's okay. Right click. Okay. And then this circle here is
tangential to this circle. I'm going to use one
of our favorite tools, the tangent constraint, select this circle, select this circle. And now we've got that tangential
constraint between the two we need the exact same
constraint between these two, so I'll select the
circle the arc, and there we have the
arc that we need. Now, we don't need all of this remainder material
of the circle. So I'm going to
select the trim tool. I'm going to highlight
over this circle, left click to remove that. Right click. Okay. I
take off this dimension, and I'm just going to
replace that with a radius, select dimension
tool, select the arc. But in a radius just makes
it a bit more easier to see. Alright, and now here we've
got an arc coming up, which goes into a straight
line following down, which is tangential to this arc. So I'm going to use
the same process here, go to put a circle in place, put that anywhere for now. And this arc has a radius of 15, so a diameter of 30 mill. Gonna make that tangential
to this circle here. So this circle and this
circle tangential. And then there's a
dimension in there. Se the dimension tool. I know that the center
point of this circle to the center point of this
circle is 22 millimeters. It's looking nice. We're
fully constrained. Everything's in
position, looking good. And now we just need to
add this connecting line, which is tangential to this circle and then
tangential to this arc. I'll select the line tool, click anywhere on this arc, anywhere on this circle. Select the tangential tool, select the line,
selec the circle. We've got that tangential
joint there looking good. Exactly the same process here. Select the line, select
the arc, tangential here. That is looking good. Now we can use the trim tool and tidy this up. Select trim. Firstly, I'm going to move this portion of the circle
here, which we no longer need. So we're just left with our arc. Again, I'm going to
remove that diameter, but in a radius there,
tidy that up, ok? Again, select the
trim tool and take away this arc which
we no longer need. Again, coming up here, we can remove this arc, this one, this one, this one, right click. Okay. And there we have
the completed model. So, as I say, when we break
this down step by step, it's actually relatively
straightforward. All the dimensions are there. We just need to understand
the relative tools and constraints that we need in order to achieve
the final result. I hope that was
okay for you guys. If you managed to do that by yourself, big
congratulations. That is quite a
tough sketch to do. Again, any questions, please
send me your comment. I'll see you in the next
lecture. Thank you.
22. Section Intro - 3D Modelling: In this section, various
modeling tools will be introduced to convert
sketches into three D models. I will begin with the
fundamental EtrueTol and we will learn how to add and remove three
dimensional material. Following that, I'll go through other common three D
modeling tools and commands such as
revolve modeling, sweep profile and paths,
engraving and embossing, shelling, adding
precision holes, fillets and chamfers,
and plenty more. Each lecture is presented
step by step where I demonstrate how these tools can be used for
common practices. Range of examples will be provided throughout
the lectures, concluding with three
examples for you to practice. Now I will be demonstrating how to complete these examples, but it is recommended
to attempt them independently using the tools and skills learned in
previous lectures. I hope that you
enjoy this session. And again, if you
have any questions, please don't hesitate to
contact me. Thank you.
23. Extrude and Cut: In this lecture, we
will learn how to use the extrusion tool and
understand its various options. We'll be using this tool to
add material and also to remove material in order for
us to model this part here. Let's take a quick
look at this part. It's a basic block,
100 mill width, 60 mill height, and
a depth of 20 mil. We've then got this rectangular slot which runs through it, which is 40 by ten mil. And then we've got
this cylindrical boss, which is 20 mill, out of diameter of 25 mil
inner diameter of 20 mil. So let's start with the three
D block very easy to draw. Come up to sketch mode, start a two D sketch, and we'll select the XY plane. We'll use the rectangle tool, start at the origin,
expand that out, and straightaway, we'll
input the dimensions. So we've got 100 mil and
the width and the height, in this case, is 60 mil. Zoom out a bit. Okay,
that's looking good. Now let's go ahead and
three D model this. Let's extrude it. So we
come to three D model. We have a whole array of
tools available here. We'll be covering many of these in the following lectures. In this lecture, we're
going to focus on the most common tool,
which is extrude. Now, as soon as we click that, a dialog box shows. Just to start with this, you can move this
around the environment. It's not fixed there. You can also hold down on
the tab itself, and you can actually
install it just on the toolbar on the left
hand side, if you prefer. My preference is to have it in the environment and I can
move it as necessary. You can also change
its shape, like so. So let's have a look
at the inputs here. So first of all, we've
got the input geometry. So here we're defining the
profile in which to select. So one profile has been automatically selected.
We click the cross there. We can then hover our mouse over our shape that we can see
there in red is highlighted. That is one profile that we can extrude. And that's
the correct one. So we'll click that.
Is extruding from, so the sketch plane, yet we want to extrude from
that plane, correct? Then we've got behavior. So here we're under the default
direction, right? So as we can see
by this arrow is extruding in this direction
from the sketch plane. You want to flip that, flip. Now we're extruding in
the opposite direction. We've also got the symmetric
symmetric extrusion. So in this case, we're extruding a total of ten mil, okay? So that's five mil in the default direction and five
mil in the flip direction. We've also got the option
here for asymmetric. So this is where
we need to input two distances. So
we've got distance A. Let's put that as 30 mil, and distance B, let's
just put that as ten, and we can see that
from the sketch plane, we're extruding 30 in this direction and then
ten in this direction. But for this model, we only need the default direction, so
we'll just click that. And we need a
distance of 20 mil. Then we've got the body name. So this is what will appear
in the design tree here. So let's say extrusion one. We've also got some advanced properties which
are rarely used. In this case, we can
put a taper on this. So if I put a five degree taper, I look through to
that, we can then see this five degree
taper just here. And if we flip that, then we can see the taper in
the other direction. There's no taper on the
block that we're drawing, so we're going to
leave that as zero. Okay, I'll press Okay. And there we have our very
first extrusion, the block. So moving on to the
next feature is a rectangular slot
through this face here. So to do this, we need
to sketch on this plane. Now, the easiest
way to do this is to left click on that plane. We've got a series
of options here. So we can edit the extrusion, we can edit the
sketch, and so forth. But on the right hand side, we can create sketch. Okay. So once again, left click. Then we left click
Create sketch, and now we're sketching
on this plane here. We want to sketch in that slot. Let's go ahead. Rectangle tool. It's 40 milwidth ten mil height. We want to position that,
go to use constraints. So we're going to use
a vertical constraint. So that will be from the
midpoint of this line to the midpoint of this line
and a horizontal constraint, midpoint of this line to the midpoint of this
line, right click. Okay. And now we can see we're fully constrained on
the bottom right corner. Everything's fixed
in exact location. That's perfect. Now we
need to go ahead and cut all of this material out according to
this geometry here. We're going to use the
extrusion tool once again. Let's go three D
model, like extrude. And now as we can see, the preview shows actually adding material, which
is not what we want. And if we come under
the output option here, we then got the output of cut. But this is where we remove material, and if we select that, we'll see the preview is
now cutting material, which is exactly what we want. Unfortunately, it's just not exactly the depth that we want. It's extruding by a distance
here of 20 millimeters. Now there are different
options for us to control how far this extrudes. Uh, one option is to extrude, yet the full length. So in this case, 60 mill, okay, that previews showing
correct. That's what we want. I want to show you a few
other options as well. So an option here is
to go through all. So if I put that back to 20, if we select through all, it will recognize
all of the material to remove and do that automatically
for us. That's great. That back to 20. And
then if we select two, here we need to select a face. So we can say extrude
to a particular face. In this case, the face
will be this one, and if I left click here, we'll see the preview
shows correct, extruding all that way through. Another one, let
me put that back. Another one is two next. So if we click To next, inventor will
automatically recognize where the next face is and
it would extrude there. But in this case, I would
just commonly click on through. No taper involved. We can hide the
advanced properties, and if we click Okay, we've then got that
extruded slot there. Perfect. And the last feature
to add on this block, we need to extrude
this boss feature, and that's coming
from this face to a left click the face
and create a sketch. Let's get these
cylinders in there. So let's start with
a circle tool, draw that anywhere for now. Got an inner diameter of 20 mil. And I'm just going to
use the offset tool to offset this circle here. Now, the outer
diameter is 25 mil, so there's a wall distance
there of 2.5 mil. So offset by 2.5. Now, this sketch is
still free to move, so let's use our
constraints once again. Let's use the vertical
constraint, centerpoint, to the center point,
horizontal constraint, centerpoint to center point. Now we're fully constrained. Everything's fixed.
That's looking good. Now let's go ahead and extrude
this. So three D model. Let's select the Extrude tool or shortcut E on the keyboard. Now here, inventor has not selected for us a
profile to extrude, and that's because it's not
sure which profile to select. We've got one profile here
and one profile here. So this is the one
we want to go for. Let's click that. The
direction is correct. So the default direction, we don't want to go
the other direction, and the total extrusion
is 20 millimeters. Okay, we'll press Okay there, and then we've got our boss. And there's just one more
feature we need to add here because there should
be no material here. So we want to cut away this
material up to this face. Note that in the model, it does not go all the
way through the block. Though quite straightforward. We want to sketch
geometry on this plane. Left click Create sketch. For this, I will use the
projected geometry tool. So I'm going to project
this geometry here. If we zoom in, we can see I'm
going to left click here, and then we've got this yellow circle that's appeared there, that's a direct projection
of this geometry here. So I've just projected
that onto this plane. So from here, we'll go to
three D model, go extrude. Now we want to extrude
cut, but again, inventor is going to add
material, not what we want. So we'll select the CUT output. And if we look down,
it's going through the entire body,
not what we want. We only want to come
up to this face here. Though different
ways to do this, we could just select to the next and then select
this face here. Okay. We could also
enter a distance there. So if I enter say ten mil,
okay? That's correct. Okay. Through all, we cannot choose because we don't want to go through all the material. Okay, so quite typically
here, I would click two, then I would select
the according face, in this case, is this one. Cross Okay. And there we could see there's no
material loss in here, or the material loss is now in here exactly
as per the drawing. So that is an overview
of the EtruTol. It's the most commonly used
three D modeling tool, very simple to use,
very straightforward. We will be using this tool in many future lectures, and
I will see you there.
24. Fillet and Chamfer: In this lecture, we will learn
how to use the fillet and the hamper tools and the
various options within them. We're going to
continue working on the part that we've done
in previous lectures. But first of all, let's start
by applying some fillets. Come up to the modification tab, select the fillet tool, and
our dialog box pops up. So for a basic fillet, essentially, we can
input our fillet here. So that's the radius. Let's
go with 2 millimeters, and then we can just
select an edge. For example, I'll select
this one here, I press Okay. We then got our two mil
radius on that edge there. We want to edit that, and right click on the fillet,
select Edit feature. Then we can make the
according edits. If we want to
unselect this edge, hold down Control
on the keyboard, and this will turn red, left click once and it
will remove it. I also want to show you the
variable radius as well. I've selected my variable
radius, to select my edge. Need to put an input here. 0.0 is the start. Let's put that as
one mil radius, and then at 1.0, which
is the ending point. Let's go over three
and exaggerate that. As we can see, we've got
this variable radius here, starting at one mil
and ending at three. Go to edit that
feature one more time and remove that fillet. Another example I want to show you is how we can select edges. So, for example, right now we are selecting
individual edges, but what we can do is
select the loop option. So if I now hover my mouse over this edge and
I click there, we can see that inventor has recognized that
loop of edges, and then we can assign
a radius to that. So if I put, let's say,
two mill, press Okay, then we can see a
two mill radius has been applied to
all of those edges. Again, I'll come back
to edit that feature, the cross to remove that. One more feature
I'd like to show you is about selection as well, and that's to select
actually an entire feature. So right here, we cut away
material of this entire slot. Now, if I select that slot, it will pick up that feature
and it's associated edges. Then by the preview, that
looks good. Click Okay. You can see that a
two mil radius has been applied to all
four of those corners. So let's go ahead and apply a few fillets to this part.
I want to modify this. Let's go for 3 millimeters. I want to add another radius. So I'm going to cook plus here. I'm going to assign
that one mil radius. Let's go for the loop selection, saves us a bit of
time, a bit more easy. We'll select that loop there. Also select the loop on
the underside, like so. Also add in one more
radius as well. And this time, I'm going
to hit the feature. That's going to
be a two mil rad. I'm going to select
this block here, all of these associated edges. Okay, so it's picked up all
of them, that's looking nice. I'm going to add one
more end of this one, which is a one mil here. Then if we click Okay,
you can see we've applied a whole series of constant radiuses there,
that's looking nice. It's a very simple tool to use, and we just say how
much that we want for the radius to be
if we want it to be a constant or a variable. We choose our selection tool, and then we can choose to add
more radiuses if we like. And again, in terms of edits, we just right click
Edit feature, can change anything
accordingly there. Let's move on to the ShampTol now. So very straightforward. Again, under the modified
tools in the top left, got the hamper option here. Different dialogue box
compared to the Fillet one. First of all, we need
to select our edges. For this example, I'm going
to choose this edge here. Now, the type of
shampo that we're applying is a 45
degree hamper, okay? So let's go ahead
with that. Let's just say 1.5 mil. That's okay. If we view this
from the left side, we can see we've got this
1.5 mil on the horizontal, 1.5 mill on the vertical, so 45 degree shampa. Right click on that, press Edit. I'd like to show you
the distance and angle. So here we select the distance. Let's go again with 1.5, and let's choose the
45 just to begin with. But first of all, we
need to select the base. Here's the face, and then we need to select the
according edge, which in this case, will be the outer one,
going on the left view. And what we'll see
here is exactly the same hampls been applied. So it's 45 degrees by 1.5. But if we change this,
let me change that too. Let's say 15 mil.
Then see that the 1.5 mil is coming from
this face up vertical, and then we've got
the 15 degree angle, a very sort of acute
angle coming off. Another option we have
is two distances. So here we just select an edge, say this edge, then we
define distance one and two. So let me exaggerate that 0.5,
and let's stick with two. Let's go on the left view. And if we look at
that preview there, we can see that the
2 millimeters is the horizontal and
the vertical is 0.5. Likewise, if I change those
around, I'll do two mill. This one's now on the vertical, and the 0.5 is on
the horizontal. Okay, let me go to edit
that one more time. Edit feature. We're
gonna stick with a 45 degree champ.
It's most common. I'm gonna go for a one
mil. Select this shirt. That's okay. There, we've got our 45 degree one mil champa.
25. Viewcube: In this lecture, we'll take
a look at the view cube. Now, you may have
seen me use this tool quite a lot throughout
the previous lectures, and I'll definitely be using it for future lectures as well. The view cube is up here on
the top right hand side, and it lets us view our
part from different angles. So, for example, we can
look at the front view, then we can use the arrows
to move around, like so. Okay, top view,
Okay, right view. We've also got these
rotational angles here, so we can rotate
our part, like so. Very important button that I use a lot is the home button. If we click this,
we're automatically brought back to the home view, which is between the top,
front and the right. Now, there are various changes
that we can make to this. The right click, we've
got an option there to go to home or just
click the button, so I'm going to use this one. We can quickly change
how we view this, so orthographic or perspective. So if I change a perspective, gives it that
element of realism. Is that we would typically
see that, with our own eyes. And for me, I typically
work in orthographic. Another view as well,
which some people use is perspective
with ortho faces. So we're looking at this
in perspective view, but if we look at the top, you'll see we then change
to author view, okay? So it just enables us to
sort of see those faces from Athoview but see the
rest from perspective. Set current view as home. So this is currently
the home view. If we want to change
that, let's say, we'll choose this corner here. We right click and
set that as home. Now, a fixed distance so I could fix the
distance like so. We can bring it really
close, or fit to view, so inventor will
automatically adjust that. So if I now go to the home
view, Okay, there we go. We've got to our new home view. I'm going to turn that back. Another option we have is
to set current view as. So what we can do is, if
this is our left view so, we can go to set current
view as the front, and we'll see it's now
changed to the front, okay? If we want to reset that,
we can go reset the front. And likewise, we can do the
same with the top as well. A few options here.
I'll only run through a few key ones to display where the view
cube actually is, so that it's top right, we
can put it in, let's say, the bottom right, click Okay, and now we see it
appear down here. Go back to options. I'm going to put that
back on the top right. Cube size, I always have this as normal. Some
people like it large. So people like it smaller, so they got more realistic
to play with, but that as large and
the inactive opacity. So when we're not
using the view cube, it's how obvious it is on
the screen, basically. So we put that to 25%. Okay. We now see the view
cube is a large size, and we see that it's
quite transparent. You know, it's
quite well hidden, as soon as we move
our mouse over it, it comes fully into view. I just put those back, so
I typically do normal, typically have on 100%, but feel free to
play with any of these options here as
per your preferences. Okay, I will see you
in the next lecture.
26. Revolve Tool & Modelling: In this tutorial,
we will learn how to use the revolve tool. So so far we've
done Extrude tool. Another very important tool
and commonly used is revolve. So revolve is creating
a feature or a body by revolving one or more sketch
profiles around an axis. So this is the part that
we'll be modeling here. And in order to model this part, we need to create a
sketch and an axis and then revolve that
sketch about the axis. So if we move on, this is then the sketch
that we need to draw. It's a very
straightforward sketch. If you'd like to do
this by yourself, by all means, please pause
the video and go ahead. But if you'd like to
follow along with me, I will create this
sketch for us now. So let's go on Start Tod sketch. For this, I'm going to
choose the YZ plane. I'm going to select the line
tool, start at the origin. Immediately, you go left 100, okay? Do them out a bit. Then we're going vertical, so 90 degree up by 40, going to the right by 60, Vertical 80, the left
by 60, Vertical 40. You go to the right 16, bound 12 to the right, 24, up 12, cross 16, bound 12 or more 24. Up another 12, and then
we'll go to the right by 20. Then we're going to finish off
that sketch by coming down vertically at 90 degrees
back to the origin. There we have a full
sketch profile. So the very first thing
we've done there, we have our sketch. Now we need to create our axis. So for this axis, it'll
be a straight line. We can draw that line
in anywhere for now. It can be any length. Let's just go for
100. Right click. Okay. Now, this sketch, we need to be a fixed
distance from this line here. So for this, they're going
to choos the dimension tool, select this line,
select our axis. And the dimension here
is 15 millimeters. A good practice. I'm just going to right click on
this and set it as a construction line. So
we've got our sketch. We've got our axis, and now all we need to do
is revolve them. I'm going to hit Finish Sketch. Okay? Go back to the home view. Come up to three D model, and we'll select
the revolve tool. Our toolbox pops up here. Remember, we can dock
that here if you prefer. Okay, or change the
size of it like so. And a few options here. So the profile inventors selected the only profile
available, which is correct. We do want to revolve
that profile. We just need to tell it which
axis to revolve it around. So in this case, we'll select
our construction line. We see a preview
of the part there. And then just like
the extrude tool, we have the behavior
options here. So in which direction
that we're rotating this. So if we flip it, symmetric and also asymmetric
and also by the angle. So if I set that at 270, then we flip the direction. Yeah, we can see we flip
the extrusion like so, or we can go symmetric. So yeah, 270, but I'll be
split in both directions. So 135 each way. Or we can go asymmetric. So here we're going
to put in two angles, so we can go 270 in one direction, and
then perhaps we can go. If we put in 20 degrees, we'll see we only go
20 in that direction. But for this model
here, we're only revolving by 270 degrees, so I'll select the
default. Okay? And again, body name,
we can call that rev one, but go okay. And there we have
our revolved part. A very straightforward tool. All it requires is a sketch and an axis to then revolve
that sketch around. This can be used for many
different geometries that have revolution features
such as this one here. Okay, hope that all makes sense, and I'll see you in
the next lecture.
27. Sweep Tool: In this lecture, we
will learn to use the basics behind
the sweep tool. And the example model, in this case, is an RClp
as we can see here. The sweep tool is very
straightforward to use. It consists of two sketches. One sketch is your profile and the other sketch is a path. So let's go ahead and I'll
demonstrate on how to use a sweep tool in order to draw
components such as this. This diagram here will show you the dimensions
that I'm using, but that down in the
bottom right corner, then we'll go ahead and we'll
complete these sketches, and then we will sweep the
profile along the path. So as I say, there
are two sketches. The very first sketch is the profile and the
second sketch is the path and the profile will extrude through the path.
We will follow that. Let's go ahead and
do the profile, which is very straightforward. For this, we're going
to choose Y Z plane. We're going to choose
the circle tool, start at the origin. We're going to bring
that out to a diameter of 4 millimeters p enter. Okay. And then we can
finish our sketch there. That's one sketch complete. That's our profile. Now we
only need to do the path. So we'll start a
new two D sketch. This one here will
be on the XY plane. Okay? Let me just draw a line
in there to demonstrate, make sure we start our line from the center
point of the circle. We don't want it offset. Check in our line
there. So what's going to happen is when
we use a sweep tool, this sketch here,
our profile will extrude following our path. So let's go ahead and finish off the remainder of our path. So following the dimensions on the sketch in the
bottom right corner, we've got 68 mill length there. Then we're coming into an arc, a straight line
down, another arc, another arc, another arc,
and then the ending point. I'm going to put in
all of the points for all of these arcs, and then we can just add in the lines and the
arcs afterwards. So quite straightforward.
Let's put in our first point. It'll be the large arc
there with a rat of 12.5. I know the dimension between
the center point of that arc and this baseline here
will be 12.5 millimeter. I just want to make sure that
is vertically constrained. So a vertical constraint between the point and the endpoint here. No fixed in position
looking good. Now let's go ahead and
add in that circle there. So start from the point in
there, bring that down. And there we've got our arc
and the arc is going to finish off somewhere here depending upon where
the other arcs are. Go ahead and add in
another arc then. We'll do our center point
first. We'll dimension that. Center to center there,
we've got 24.5 millimeter. And we've got a height
here of about 10.5. Okay, let's go ahead
and add in our circle, which will turn
into an arc later, the rot of five diameter
of ten. Do the same thing. We've got another point. I
was just roughly down here. Dimension that from the
original center point there, which is 36.3. It's got a height there
to the base of 5.6. Go ahead and add
in a circle there. Okay, Route five, diameter ten. Good, add in the other arc
as well, roughly up here. We know that it's horizontally constrained to this circle here. Is a horizontal constraint.
I like that point. I like this point.
Then we'll just put in one more dimension to the
center point of this circle. That is 53.2. Then we've got one last point. I'll throw it over here.
Again, that's horizontal to this point here.
Constrain those two. And then I'll dimension
that point there. Original center point
over here at 68. Hey, everything's
fully constrained. Let's go ahead and add in the remaining arcua
diameter ten. Then we just need to use the
line tool quite simply start forming lines
between our circles like so. There'll be the path. The profile follows. I use the tangent tool here. So I believe this
is already tangent. Okay, so now that's
tangent line to circle. Okay, that's already
tangent line to circle. Again, just repeating that good. We can tidy this up.
We use the trim tool. Don't need this material, this material, this
material, this material. If we finish the sketch there, let's take a look
at where we are. But our profile will follow a straight line around this arc, down, up, down, and then to the end point there.
Looking good. Go to three D model then and try this out on the sweep tool. Now under the profile, inventors already selected our profile. Okay, fantastic.
Then at the path, all we need to do then
is to select the path, which in this case, is what
we've drawn here that sketch. Not going to include
a taper or a twist. And if we look at that,
that's looking good. If you do want to experiment
with taper, you can. If I put a one degree
taper on that, you'll see it becomes
larger, one degree. If I minus that, let's
do -0.3, Okay, 0.5. You can see by the profile
there what the taper does. But for this, an RClip doesn't
have a taper, plus okay. Going to tidy that
up a little bit. I'm gonna apply
material to this. Let's go with carbon steel. Gonna come under the view tab. Gonna put the visual
style shaded. You're on the home
view. There we have our completed arclip
using the Sweep tool. It's a very simple tool, two sketches, a
profile and a path. The profile will follow the path throughout
its extrusion. Okay, I hope you're
able to follow along, okay. Any questions? Please send them to
me. Apart from that, I will see you in
the next lecture.
28. Engraving Embossing Text: In this tutorial,
we will learn how to engrave or emboss text. So in the two D
sketching section, we learn how to add
text or text geometry, and now we'll apply
those principles to our part that we have here, we'll either engrave
or emboss that text. So let's add some text
to the front face here. So we left click on that
face, create TD sketch, bring that to the
center roughly, and then we're going to
add in some geometry text. So we need some geometry to kind of project
this text from. So in this case, I want
to use this edge here. So I'm going to project then
select that edge there. Now we see that's now in yellow. It's a direct projection, and we can use that to
base our geometry text. So we come up to the text tool, and we'll select geometry text, and then we need to select the geometry for
that text to be on. In which case, it's
our yellow line. We have our dialog
box pop up here. Feel free to write your name
or anything else you like. I'm going to write
Inventor 2025. I'm going to select that. I want to offset it from this line. So I want it slightly up. Let's go with 3 millimeters. In terms of justification, let's put it on the right
justification. Make that bold. I think there was about
all the edits from here. Let's also add a few spaces
after the last piece of text. Let's add four
spaces. It's okay. Then we can see we've got that
text on the bottom there. So that's two
dimensional currently. Let's look at how we
can emboss that from the surface or engrave
it into the surface. So for this, let's
finish the sketch. Let's come up to three D model, and we'll select
our Extrude tool. Now we need to select the
profile in which to extrude. So in this case, it
is a text itself. We'll select that.
It's extruding from the sketch plane,
which is correct. And in terms of direction, yet, that's looking correct
to emboss the text. Okay, let's go by 0.5 mil. Okay. There we've embossed
that text onto our part. Let's have a look at how
we can engrave this. So if you want to change
this to engraving, we can come up to
our design tree. We can right click
on the extrusion. We go down to Edit feature. Then from here, we're just going to make some small edits. So first of all, we want this
to cut into the material, and just make sure
that we're cutting in the right direction. So we need to flip
the direction. Yep, so we're cutting
into the material. Now. If we look from
the right side, we can see that we're now engraving into the
surface. We press Okay. There we can see we've
engraved our text there. Okay, so a very simple tool to use and can
be very effective, especially if you're designing molds for plastic injection. Okay, let's leave
that on this part, and I'll see you in
the next tutorial.
29. Fillet and Chamfer: In this lecture, we will learn
how to use the fillet and the hamper tools and the
various options within them. We're going to
continue working on the part that we've done
in previous lectures. But first of all, let's start
by applying some fillets. Come up to the modification tab, select the fillet tool, and
our dialog box pops up. So for a basic fillet, essentially, we can
input our fillet here. So that's the radius. Let's
go with 2 millimeters, and then we can just
select an edge. For example, I'll select
this one here, I press Okay. We then got our two mil
radius on that edge there. We want to edit that, and right click on the fillet,
select Edit feature. Then we can make the
according edits. If we want to
unselect this edge, hold down Control
on the keyboard, and this will turn red, left click once and it
will remove it. I also want to show you the
variable radius as well. I've selected my variable
radius, to select my edge. Need to put an input here. 0.0 is the start. Let's put that as
one mil radius, and then at 1.0, which
is the ending point. Let's go over three
and exaggerate that. As we can see, we've got
this variable radius here, starting at one mil
and ending at three. Go to edit that
feature one more time and remove that fillet. Another example I want to show you is how we can select edges. So, for example, right now we are selecting
individual edges, but what we can do is
select the loop option. So if I now hover my mouse over this edge and
I click there, we can see that inventor has recognized that
loop of edges, and then we can assign
a radius to that. So if I put, let's say,
two mill, press Okay, then we can see a
two mill radius has been applied to
all of those edges. Again, I'll come back
to edit that feature, the cross to remove that. One more feature
I'd like to show you is about selection as well, and that's to select
actually an entire feature. So right here, we cut away
material of this entire slot. Now, if I select that slot, it will pick up that feature
and it's associated edges. Then by the preview, that
looks good. Click Okay. You can see that a
two mil radius has been applied to all
four of those corners. So let's go ahead and apply a few fillets to this part.
I want to modify this. Let's go for 3 millimeters. I want to add another radius. So I'm going to cook plus here. I'm going to assign
that one mil radius. Let's go for the loop selection, saves us a bit of
time, a bit more easy. We'll select that loop there. Also select the loop on
the underside, like so. Also add in one more
radius as well. And this time, I'm going
to hit the feature. That's going to
be a two mil rad. I'm going to select
this block here, all of these associated edges. Okay, so it's picked up all
of them, that's looking nice. I'm going to add one
more end of this one, which is a one mil here. Then if we click Okay,
you can see we've applied a whole series of constant radiuses there,
that's looking nice. It's a very simple tool to use, and we just say how
much that we want for the radius to be
if we want it to be a constant or a variable. We choose our selection tool, and then we can choose to add
more radiuses if we like. And again, in terms of edits, we just right click
Edit feature, can change anything
accordingly there. Let's move on to the ShampTol now. So very straightforward. Again, under the modified
tools in the top left, got the hamper option here. Different dialogue box
compared to the Fillet one. First of all, we need
to select our edges. For this example, I'm going
to choose this edge here. Now, the type of
shampo that we're applying is a 45
degree hamper, okay? So let's go ahead
with that. Let's just say 1.5 mil. That's okay. If we view this
from the left side, we can see we've got this
1.5 mil on the horizontal, 1.5 mill on the vertical, so 45 degree shampa. Right click on that, press Edit. I'd like to show you
the distance and angle. So here we select the distance. Let's go again with 1.5, and let's choose the
45 just to begin with. But first of all, we
need to select the base. Here's the face, and then we need to select the
according edge, which in this case, will be the outer one,
going on the left view. And what we'll see
here is exactly the same hampls been applied. So it's 45 degrees by 1.5. But if we change this,
let me change that too. Let's say 15 mil.
Then see that the 1.5 mil is coming from
this face up vertical, and then we've got
the 15 degree angle, a very sort of acute
angle coming off. Another option we have
is two distances. So here we just select an edge, say this edge, then we
define distance one and two. So let me exaggerate that 0.5,
and let's stick with two. Let's go on the left view. And if we look at
that preview there, we can see that the
2 millimeters is the horizontal and
the vertical is 0.5. Likewise, if I change those
around, I'll do two mill. This one's now on the vertical, and the 0.5 is on
the horizontal. Okay, let me go to edit
that one more time. Edit feature. We're
gonna stick with a 45 degree champ.
It's most common. I'm gonna go for a one
mil. Select this shirt. That's okay. There, we've got our 45 degree one mil champa.
30. Shell & Holes: In this lecture, we
will take a look at the shell tool and
also how to add holes. So for the shell tool,
let's start with that. I'm going to start
a two D sketch. In this case, we'll
select the X Z plane. Going to use the rectangle tool, two point center rectangle.
To start at the origin. Going to zoom out. We're
going to do 100 mill, es tab on the keyboard, Enter 100 again, Enter. We've got a square 100.
Got a three D model. Let's extrude that.
Extrude that as well by 100 so that we have a cube 100 by 100 by 100. That's okay. Now we're going to use
the shell command. Let's click this. Our dialogue box pops up. Now, we have the option
here to remove a face. I'm going to do that
for the purposes of this lecture as we can see
more clearly what's happening. By the preview, you can already see that we have a
wall thickness there, which currently is one mil. Then we bump that up to ten mil. Well press Okay. If we zoom out, we can then see
that I've shelled away the inner material. Right click on
Shell, Edit Feature, click Remove faces, so I
can remove another face. I'm to select this
one here.Rsoka. Now we can see that both
of those faces have been removed and we have our
ten mil wall thickness. I'm going to select that sketch, right click on it and
turn on the visibility, and we can see the
dimensions there. I want to show you edit
that feature again. The difference that's made if I select an outside shell
or an inside shell. The shell we've done is inside. What's happened here is that
the ten mil wall thickness has been added to the inside, and then any further material inside has then been
removed or shelled out. But if we click outside, we'll see that the ten
mil wall thickness has been added outside
of our sketch. And that anything inside of the sketch has
then been removed. There's one more
option here as well, which is the kind of
both inside and outside. So we'll see here that five mil has been added to the inside, five mil to the outside, and anything further inside
of that has been shelled out. That's okay. Okay, and we just turn the visibility
for that sketch off again, and then we'll move on
to the whole command. For the whole command, let's go back again and work
on this part here. I go to use this as a demonstration for
the whole command. Let's select this face here. This is where we want
our holes to go through. Click Create sketch. Okay? Now we're facing
this plane here. Now, we need to add
some reference points for where these
holes are to start. So for this, we use the point. I'm going to sketch in one point there and roughly
one over there. Do the dimension tool. But these in an
accurate position. Let's go six from
this edge here, and then six from
this edge here. Likewise, we'll do the
same over here, six. Same here. Six. Those are
now fully constrained. And there are reference points. Let's finish up
the sketch there. Let's go to three D model, and we'll select the le command or shortcut H on the keyboard, then we'll see this
dialog box pop up. The very first input
is the geometry. So in this case, inventor
has selected for us both of the points that
we've added, which is correct. You can choose these manually. So if we clear the selections, we can select if we
just want the one, or in this case, we'll
go for the both, so we'll keep them
both selected. In terms of the type, we
need to define the hole. So in this case, simple hole, clearance tapped, and
then a taper tapped hole. So for this example, we're going to go ahead with a simple hole. We also need to define the seat. So right now we've got the
counter sink option selected. There's a spotface
option, okay, like so. There's a counter
bore option, like so, or there's no seat at all, and it's just a straightforward
through hole, so no seat. Let's go with a
countersunk hole. Both of these. Let's
come further down. So termination. Right now, I've got the through
all selected. So these holes will go through all of the material available. We want to change that and only want that to be a certain depth, we can select a distance there. And also select the type
of drill point, okay? So going from there before
this demonstration, we're going to go
with through all. We can also select two, as well, which we can then define
like a face to go to. Alright, let's stick with
through, and then direction. We don't want to well, there's nothing we can drill
in the other direction. So keep the default direction,
that's looking good. And then we've got a
series of numbers here, which we can define ourselves. So the diameter of
the countersunk. Yeah, let's go with eight mill. The angle, stick with 90, and then the diameter
of the hole itself. So yeah, let's stick
with five mil. In this case. We press Okay. And now we even put two
countersunk holes which go through the diameter
there of 5 millimeters. Et's just go back
quickly to that tool. So you see there
are many options, many different types of holes, many variables and
inputs that we can give. We can customize this
as much as we need, feel free to have a play
around with this tool. And aside from that, I will
see you in the next lecture.
31. Applying Threads: In this tutorial, we will learn how to apply a visual thread. So to demonstrate this,
we'll go ahead and draw this basic hex head bolt, and then we'll
apply that thread. So let's start with
a two D sketch. Let's select the XY plane, and we'll start with a polygon. So we'll come under
the rectangle tools, select our polygon tool. Make sure we got the number
six there so six sides, start at the origin, bring
this out. Right click. Okay. And then immediately
we'll add a dimension, which will be the
dimension of the flats. So flat to flat dimension, in this case is 10 millimeters. Looking good. Tidy that up. I'll put in a vertical
constraint on this line here. Make sure it's like so it's fully constrained, looking nice. Let's go ahead and extrude that then three D model.
Let's go extrude. We'll go for as per the
drawing, 4 millimeters, okay. Looking good. Now we need to draw the shank
and the threaded part. But in that case, we'll
be drawing on this face. Left click once,
create two D sketch. Wants to use the circle tool, start at the origin,
open this up. This is an M six bolt that will go for 6 millimeters
in diameter. Right click, okay. Back to three D model.
Let's extrude that. So total length is 20
millimeters. Let's enter. Okay, let's also put a
shampa on this edge here. They use the hamper tool here. Add the hamper, in this case, it's an equal chamfer
of 0.5 mil, so not 0.5. I'll select that edge
there. That's okay. But our hamper there.
We've got the hex head. Now let's go ahead
and add this thread. So for this, we come up
to the modified tools, and we select the thread. Okay, our dialog box
pops up once again. So the input geometry, we only need to
enter a face here. So very straightforward and
a click on this face here. And then we have
some details pop up. So this is where we can
detail the type of thread. So you'll select the
according standard, I typically draw using
isometric profiles. The size, it's recognized,
the diameter there. So at six, then designation,
so the thread pitch. So yeah, the standard. I'm
going to go for six by one. Class and then
direction clockwise, counterclockwise,
and then behavior. So if we want to
do a full thread, we can select this button here, which is full depth, okay, full thread, so 19.5 mill. But in this case,
we can only enter. Let's go for 16 millimeters. Okay? Press okay. There we
have our visual thread. Now if we zoom in on this, we can actually see that there's no material missing
from this shank. And that's why I say
it's a visual thread. It's not a physical thread. Now, one of the great
advantages about this in Autodesk inventor is that a visual thread will not consume
a lot of hardware power. As soon as we start taking off material here and having
a physical thread, the part file becomes
increasingly large, and it can really
put a strain on your hardware and your computer. Where we're able to
do visual threads, I would always recommend using them over physical threads. Okay, I hope that makes sense. Any comments, please put
them in a comment section, and I will see you
in the next lecture.
32. Materials & Appearances: In this lecture, we will
learn how to assign a material to a part
and also an appearance. So right now, these are
controlled at the very top. These are controlled
at the very top. So we've got two boxes here
with drop down options. The very first one
is a material. So let's the drop down there. At the very bottom, we've got options there
so the favorites, the autodesk material
library, which is huge, then the inventor
material library, which generally has
everything that we need. So for this example here, let's go ahead with
a stainless steel, and immediately, we see the
appearance of this change. We've got this nice stainless
steel visual appearance, and all the properties of generic stainless steel
have then been applied. For example, if we go into file and then select
I properties, then come under
physical, click Update. We've now got information
such as the mass of this part according to those dimensions and
the material assigned, this weighs 0.776 kilograms. We've got the area there,
millimeters squared, and the volume millimeters
cubed and so forth. But the mass itself is
actually calculated, taking into account the density, in this case, of
stainless steel. So that's how we
assign a material, a bit more advanced on top of that if we select
this option here. So yeah, material brings
up this box here. If we open up the home, then we open up the inventor
material library, we've got a series
of options here that have been categorized
under ceramics, concretes, we've got liquids. We've got a whole
series of metals here, but plastics, as well. So we can choose
to add any one of these materials and
assign it to our part. For the most part, I do it
from this drop down here. In this case, I've
selected stainless steel. On top of that, we can
also apply an appearance. So stainless steel has been associated with a
semi polished finish. Okay? And that's a reference
directly to stainless steel. But if we want, we
can also change that. So, for example, let's go on, I know, sky blue dark. Okay? So this is
now the appearance. Now, this part will retain the properties of
stainless steel. The appearance will be, in
this case, sky blue dark. Okay, I'm going to press
Control Z to go back. And what we can do is assign appearances to individual faces. For example, if I select this
face, I can then assign, let's go for red,
and then we have that appearance
there. Control Z. What I want to do here is assign an appearance to the
inventor 2025 embossed text. So I need to select all
of the faces there. There are different
ways to do this. Number one, I can just hold
down left mouse button, drag over all of those, and let go, and I've
selected them all. Another way is to actually select the feature
itself in the tree. But in my case, extrusion ten. Hey, I'll select
that. All those faces have then been highlighted. Going to come under
the appearance. And I'm going to
give this let's go for an anodized
black appearance. West the front
view. There we go. So it's looking like it's nice. It's got quite a bit
of contrast there on the stainless steel appearance of the remainder of the part. If you want to remove any appearances that
you've assigned, you can click on clear. And if we bring this across, we can say select all. Okay? So we'll recognize the appearance that
we've assigned. So that's an anomaly in
this case. Click Okay. And then that has returned to the semi polished appearance, as is linked with the
stainless steel material. Cross Control Z on the keyboard, bring that appearance back. I quite like that. Looking good. Okay, so feel free to
assign any material you want to this part and
also any appearance. Feel free to have a play around. Okay, yeah, thanks for
listening. Any questions? Please put them in
the comment section, and I'll see you in
the next lecture.
33. Decals Images: In this tutorial, we will learn how to add an image to our part. So I'm going to be
working on the same part that we've been doing
in previous lectures. And to do this, it's quite
a straightforward process. We come up to start
a two D sketch, and then we need to
select a plane or a face. In this case, I'm going
to be adding my image to this face here while
left click on this face. And then I'll come
up to the insert, which is under the sketch tab, and then I'll move up to
image, so insert image. Then if you head to
your location of where your images, our
location is here. It's called picture
one. It's open. Now I see this box appears, and we need to left click on
where we want this to go. I'm just going to put
this to the side by now, and we'll see how big this is. Okay? As we can see there, it's quite a large image,
the engineer loading. So if I move that over our
part, it's far too big. I need to scale that down. Come back to the front view, so I'll click on the front
face on the ViewCube. I'm going to move
this over here. Now, in terms of scaling,
we have various options. Number one, we can
just select the image. Come over to the corner here, hold on the left mouse button, and we can scale that
manually like so. Another option is to
use the scale tool. So under sketch, come up
to the modified tools. Got the option here to scale. You need to select
what we're scaling. In this case, the image. We
need to select a base point. In this case, we can choose what we can choose
anywhere on the image. I'll just choose this corner, and then we can input
a scale factor. I want to scale this right down, so roughly like this. So if we go 0.25 per center, we can see that
that's scale 0.25. A press Control Z
on the keyboard, and I'll show you my
favorite way of scaling, which is just to use
the dimension tool. Coming up to the image, we can select the horizontal
line in this case, and I'm going to give
that a dimension of, let's go with 20 millimeters. Okay, so if we come across, I think that size is acceptable. I come out of the
dimension tool, I'm going to left click and
then track this around. Okay? So it's not constrained
in position to do that. Let's come under
the dimension tool, select this corner
here, select this edge. Let's give that a dimension of let's go for 2 millimeters. I think that looks okay. And
then to this vertical edge, let's dimension from
the corner point. Let's do that again
2 millimeters. Right click Okay, come out
of the dimension tool. And so now the image
is constrained, and we've scaled it to the size that we want.
Let's click Finish. Now, that's looking
good, but unfortunately, we've got a series of
dimensions that are showing. We can also see the border around the image as well
in this orange color. That's because it's
still in a sketch. Okay? So if we look under here, the name of minus sketch 17. Let's go under
three D model now. Let's come under the decal tool. Going to select the
image. So inventors, there's only one image here, and inventors just pick
that up for me. Fantastic. If it
doesn't for any reason, then we can then select the
image, left click once, and then it selected that image for us in the blue border. Now we'll select the face that
we want to decal that too. In this case, it's
this face here. So we'll left click
once Pres okay. Now we can see those
dimensions are gone, and also so is the border. If we look at our design tree, we see the decal command here, what's got a drop
down next to it. So if we want to
make any changes, we can right click
on the sketch, edit sketch, change
any of the dimensions, we can rescale this, et cetera. And that's how we can add an
image in Autodesk inventor. So feel free to add any image
that you like to your part, and I will see you
in the next lecture.
34. Basic Rendering: In this lecture, we will learn
how to do a basic render. Rendering, I think is
absolutely fantastic. I can output a
really nice image. It can be used in
presentations for clients, co workers, reports that
we're feeding back, perhaps to our boss or
lecturer, et cetera. Let's go ahead and do a basic
render of this model here. So to do this, let's go
under the environments tab. Now there are two key
environments in inventor. Number one is stress analysis, and then we've got
Inventor Studio. So let's select Inventor Studio. In the studio, we've got
various options here, okay? So in terms of doing
a basic render, we're going to
select render image, and we're going to
use the options that we have
available to us here. So under the general tab, we can define the
resolution that we want. So I typically go for 16
by nine high resolution, give me a nice quality output, and I can then use that in
a presentation or such. So I'll select this one camera will stick with the standard. Now you can input
your own camera bit more advancer rendering. That will be under the
camera option here. Terms of lighting
studio, I'm just going to go ahead
with the default IBL, but feel free to have a play around and choose
whichever one that you think is most appropriate or the part that you're
trying to show. I'll choose default IBL. And output. That's just saving the image,
which we can do. Anyway, we don't need to
necessarily select that here. Then the renderer, we need to choose one of these
three options here. So we can specify
a time to render, so that really comes
down to your sort of computer power on the
quality output there. We can just state render for 1 minute however many
iterations that may be. We can also state a
number of iterations. So the higher the
number of iterations, the better quality and the
more representative and realistic that the
rendered image comes out as dependent on
the assigned material. So in this case,
stainless steel. This is going to set
to 64 iterations. Okay, or you can select
until satisfactory, so it'll render indefinitely
until you tell it to stop rendering until you're satisfied with
the quality output. But for this example, I
just go by 64 iterations, and the lighting and
material accuracy, I'm going to go with high and leave the image
filtering as it is. Go ahead and render and
see how that comes out. We can see the number of
iterations just down here. So iteration is completed, round 11, 12, and so forth. And that's got to go to 64, and that's dependent
on the power of the PC that I'm using. And there the 64 iterations is complete and quite happy with
the outcome of that render. Now, if I did want to
increase the quality, I could increase the
number of iterations or just render it indefinitely
until I'm satisfied with it. We can still see quite a
bit of grain detail here, particularly in
these reflections. But for me, that's satisfactory, and I'd be happy to use
that in a presentation. In terms of saving the file, you can just click Save then save that to suitable location. Do want to change
the angle, it's completely dependent on
where the view cube is. So yeah, if you want to
render from this angle here or from the home view, you
go from the left view. And one thing you
can also do is to change if you're an
orthographic or perspective. If we view an
orthographic, you know, we render like this or if we view in perspective,
like I just did there. But overall, I'm quite happy with the render
that came out. So yeah, that's how
to do a basic render. It can be really effective
if you're presenting to clients or your boss to your
lecturer, and so forth. I'll see you in
the next lecture.
35. Project 4 - 3D Modelling: In this example, we will
three D model this part here. So the very first
thing we need to decide is where we will start. What will be the very
first extrusion. In this case, the most easy
part to start in is the base. It's 100 by 60, and I get the 60 from taking
the radius of the arc, take that radius of 30, multiply that by two, 60, then we'll add in
the arc itself. Then we'll three D extrude that, also accounting for the slot, and then we'll add the other two extrusions at the
back of this part. So to begin with, let's
start a two D sketch. Let's do this on the X z plane. Let's start with
a rectangle tool. Go for the two point rectangle. Start at the origin,
bring that over. Zoom out a bit, and let's
enter some dimensions. So for the width, let's say
twice the radius, so 60. And for the length of this
part, we're going for 100 mil. Now we're going to
go for the arc, which is around here, move
this dimension out the way. So for this, I'm going to
use the arc center point. And this is very simple
because we're going to start at the center
point of this line here. We'll bring that out
and well to snap on to the endpoint of this line, and then bring that arc
all the way around and then snap on to the other
endpoint of that line. Right click, okay.
Right click that. But as a construction line, we don't need that to be taken into account when
we three D model. Now let's input
the slot geometry. So for this, we'll
come back into the rectangle and slot tools, and we'll take the center
to center slot as we've already got that
dimension there of 24 mil between the centers. We'll start at the center
point of this arc. We'll bring that
across to 24 enter. Okay, now in terms of
the width of that slot, it is 16 mil there we
have our slot in place. Let's finish the sketch there, back to the home
view. Let's extrude. Select the profile.
We're going to extrude that as per the drawing
at 20 millimeters. Enter. Just go to change
the home view quickly. Would prefer to be
looking at it like so. So I've selected my corner
there on the ViewCube, right click Set
current view as home, and I'll put bit to view. The only part left to do are the two arms at the back here. Now, to do this, I
would recommend drawing the sketch on this plane and
then extruding backwards. Let's left click that face, create sketch. Ahead
and model this in. So I'm going to go let's go with the rectangle
tool again. Start at the corner point
here, bring that up. Now, the diameter of that
arc is the length is 48 mil, press tab on the keyboard, and the height of this
rectangular part is 50 -20. That's 30. So we've got this rectangular
portion in place. Now we need to put the arc in so the same process
here, centerpoint arc. Start at the center
point of this line. We're going to start the arc at the endpoint of this line, bring that around at the
endpoint of this line. Nice. Now we need to put
in that through hole. So for this, simply,
use a circle tool. Again, start the center
point of this line, bring that out, the
diameter is 20 millimeters. Let's go ahead and
delete that line. We no longer need that in place. Finish the sketch there. Go
to three D model extrude. Need to select the profile. In this case, this one here. Okay, so that's going in the wrong direction to what we want. I'll click flipped. And in terms of the
depth of this extrusion, it is 10 millimeters
as per the drawing. Okay, previews looking good. Press okay. And now we need
to add the other arm, okay? So to do this, we could repeat
the exact same process, but the time consuming. The way I would go about
this is to add a plane, and then I would add a plane
running down the center here and then mirror this
feature in that plane, so it will mirror into position. So in terms of the options here, I'm going to go mid plane
between two planes. My first reference
face is this one. My second reference
face is this one. And as we can see
this preview here, so we've just generated a plane essentially in the middle
of the part there. Okay, now let's go ahead
and use the mirror tool. So we'll come to
our pattern tools, select mirror in
terms of features. I'm going to select this
feature here so you can either click on it as in the model, or we can come over
to the design tree. We can select that extrusion. So in this case, extrusion to. The mirror plane, that's the
plane that we created here. So again, we can either click this plane or select
in the design tree. And we see a preview
in green there. That looks good. Okay,
let's go ahead and accept that there we go. There we have both of the
features back to the home view. I don't want to be
seeing this plane, so we can either right
click and turn off the visibility or
in the design tree, we can come under the plane, right click and turn
off the visibility. There we're left with
a complete part. We'll go ahead and add
an appearance to this. Let's go for Skyblue Dark. That's quite a nice one. Okay, I hope you were able to
follow along okay. And if you did this
yourselves, big, well done. Any questions, any comments? Please send them to
me. Aside from that, I will see you in
the next lecture.
36. Project 5 - 3D Modelling: In this example,
we'll be modeling some basic piping
structure such as this. I've included the dimensions
on the screen here. So if you'd like to
have a go at this by yourself, feel free to do so. Just keep in mind what
is the optimal feature, the optimal command and tool to use for a part such as this. And moving on, I'm going to have a go at drawing this myself. I'll come up to a new part, select the standard
millimeter part, click Create Okay, so
we need two sketches. We need our profile,
and we need our path. So for the profile, I do
that on the Y Z plane. It's like the circle tool. As per the dimensions, we
have an outer diameter of 30 mill and a wall
thickness of 2.5 mil. So in this case, I'm going
to use the offset tool, select my circle, draw that in, type in 2.5, press Enter. Then we can see we've got
our 2.5 mil wall thickness. That's our profile complete. We only need our path
now now we could do this in a series of
two dimensional sketches, but it will get a bit hectic. And what we can
do is just to use the three dimensional sketch
very straightforward. So we'll start a three
dimensional sketch. Select the line too. Make sure we start at the
origin of the circle. We don't want to be offset. So make sure that
snaps to the origin. Okay? And then
we're just going to follow the dimensions from here. So going in this direction, we have a length of 200. Okay, we're then turning
right 200, vertical 200. This direction, 200 going down. Then we're going to finish
that off 200 there. Right click Okay, to
leave the line tool. Now, we need to
add in these radii around the corners so
they're 50 millimeters. But to do this, we're
going to come under our three D sketch
tools select bend. And here we'll enter
50 millimeters, then we'll just select
the according lines. The one line here, this one. These guys these guys.
And the last one. There we go. Okay, let's
finish that sketch there. Let's have a look. Got
profile is looking good, and the path is
looking good as well. That's all as per
other dimensions in the drawing and
the bottom right. Let's go ahead and see
if we can sweep this. Who's our sweep command. Need to select the profile. Now we've got two
profiles available to us. This one, this one.
Obviously it's piping. We'll be going with
this one. Another path. Get on to select our path here. Review is looking
good. I like that. Okay, no taper, no twist. Press Okay. Right,
and there we go. There we have our model. We go to tidy that
up a little bit. Let's add an appearance there. So let's go for a copper. Let's go on view, turn off. So we turn on just shaded. And let's also go on
a perspective view. Hey, looking a bit
more realistic in what we'd maybe see in real life. Okay, I hope you were able
to follow along, okay. And if you did that
yourself, yeah, well done. Any questions, please
send me a message. Aside from that, I'll see
you in the next lecture.
37. Project 6 - 3D Modelling: In this example, we'll be
drawing this part here. Now, this might look a bit
intimidating at first. There's quite a lot of various
geometries going on here. I got a number of
different size fillets. We've got some chamfers. We've got some whole features, additional material there
coming on the outside, which is then mirrored around. There's a lot of detail
to include here. So we need to,
first of all, think about which three D
modeling tool would be the most optimized for generating as much of this
geometry as possible. And in that case, it
is the revolve tool. Following that, we'll need
to use the extrusion tool, and we can add any
hampers later. So at this point, I would recommend that
you have a go at drawing this yourself using this
sketch schematic here, which is a basis of
the revolve feature. But from here on in,
I'm going to have a go at drawing this myself. But let's start a new parts like the standard millimeters
part create. Start to D sketch. I'm going to do this
on the XY plane. I'm going to start at
the origin with a line. Now, this will be my
axes of revolution. I'm just going to
draw this in here. I can put any dimension there. It doesn't need to
be anything fixed, but let's put ten for now. I make that a
construction line just so it's definitely not a part
of any profile that I draw. Okay, and then I'll also do the distance line
as well because there's a through
hole in this part. So we don't want any
material to be in here, so we want a distance between this and any of the
profiles that we create. So let's start with
the line tool and just follow the sketch from
here, so 45 across. We're going vertical by five, coming across by 15, and then we've got an arc. So a shortcut to
use the arc tool. Currently in the line tool. If we go back to where
the line started, hold down the left mouse button, we can then bring out an arc. And we can follow that
up with some dimensions. The dimension that
arcs eight radius. We want to make sure that it's
tangent to this line here. So if we select the line, we'll see it's already
tangent with this line there. Fantastic. Then
we're going to go ahead and draw that
vertical line in, which is 50 mil in length. We want to make sure there's a tangency here,
which there isn't. So we'll select the
tangency constraint. Select the arc, select
the vertical line. Then if we select that arc, we'll see the tangent
constraint at the top and also at the
beginning of the line. Perfect. Let's go back into the line tool and continue our sketch from the
endpoint of this line. But here, we've got another arc. Let's go back to where
the line started, hold down the left mouse button, add in an arc like so.
Dimension that up. Give that a radius of 40. Okay? We've got that tangency constraint there with this
straight line, perfect. Let's continue with
the line tool. We're coming across by 40. Wanna make sure these are tangent, as well,
which they're not. But let's tangency
arc to line perfect. Back to the line tool. Now we're going vertical by ten, cross 15, down
three, right, three. And we're going up eight. We're going across five. Then we're going down five. Then we're going across 65, going to go up four, going to go across 14. And then if we go down, we should have a
vertical line going all the way back to our
starting point there. Here we have the profile in
which we're going to revolve. That's great. We've got our
axis of revolution just here. We can see we're
fully constrained, so everything's dimensioned,
everything's fixed. Let's finish that sketch
right there with a home view. Go on three D model, we'll select our
revolve feature. Inventor selected the
only profile available, which is the one that
we want to revolve. We just need to
tell it the axis. In this case, I'll select the
axis that we drew in here, and we can see a preview of the model that's
looking good. Press okay. Let's go ahead
and add some hampers now. Let's go two mill chamfers. There's one chamfer
on this edge here, another chamfer on this edge, both two mill, press okay. Now we need to take a look at the whole features which are surrounding the top plate here. To do this, let's begin a
sketch on this plane here. Just going to go roughly to
the top around this area. We're going to draw in a circle. In this case, it's 40 mil, 20 mil on the radius, but in a vertical
constraint between the center point and
the center point here. Okay? So now we can
move our circle anywhere alongside that
constraint we've just added. We know that the center
point of this circle is coincident with
this circle here. But we choose the
coincident constraint, center point to the circle, now that's fully constrained.
It cannot move anywhere. That's great. Now we need to
add in this mounting hole. Is a circle tool again. Let's add in a circle anywhere. It's ten millimetres diameter. Then we use the
vertical constraint between the center point of that circle and the
center point of this circle. Right click, okay. Add in a dimension there then. So from here to the top of
this circle is 12 millimeters. We can't quite select
that quadrant, add in a line here, and also use that line to mirror,
as well, some arcs. Right click on that
line construction. Move that dimension. So that's dimension
between the top of this line and the center
point of our circle. Do that at 12 millimeters. We no longer need the
remainder of this circle, so I use the trim tool to remove that we only need here two arcs, one coming off here and
one coming off here. Both of these are tangential, so they'll be tangent to this arc and tangent
to this circle. So use the arc tool then. Again, I'm just going
to place in an arc. I'll give that the radius
here, which is ten mil. Okay, not quite what
we had in mind, but we can use the tangent
tool to tidy that up, select this arc and this one, but that nice join there. Again, we'll select this
arc and this circle, but that nice join there, and that's fully constrained. Now we can go ahead
and trim away this excess material
here, the trim tool. Trim away that,
right click Okay. Now we need to do the
same on the other side. In this case, I've
got the center line, and so I'm just going to
mirror this arc across. P let the mirror tool, the geometry I wish
to mirror this arc, the mirror line I'll be this construction
line here, okay. Trim away this
material here also. There we go. Just tidy
up these dimensions. At a radius on that. Now we're fully constrained. We have our mounting holes. Let's go ahead and extrude that. Really model extrude. Got two profiles to select from. We want to choose
this profile here, and we want to come
up to this face here. So profile selected. It's coming from the
sketch plane, perfect. Going in the wrong direction.
Lip that direction. Okay? We could come
up by ten mil, be a bit more accurate,
and I'll click two and select the
face, this one. Then we'll see it
will only extrude that sketch profile
to this face here. Okay. Looking good. Now we just need to
pattern this around. So we've got five instances. In this case, I'm going to select the circular
pattern tool. I need to highlight a
feature to pattern. Come to my design tree, not the Shampa or the rev going to pattern this
extrusion as selected. And under the rotation axis, we can just select
at this face here, and we'll take the axis of that, so we can see the axis
has popped up there. Okay, so we've got
six iterations there. We want to change that to five. I want to keep the angle
of 360. Change up to 180. Yep, it won't cover the full
of the face. Cover 360. Okay. So there we go. That's how we use the revolution command to get the vast majority of
the feature there. Then following that, we've just added a few of the
basic hampers, then added one of
the extrusions. So this is the mounting hole, and then we've
circular pattern that feature so that we've
got all five of them. Change the material here, make that look slightly different, go with the carbon steel. Okay, and that's looking
fairly representative, following the dimensions that
were given in the sketch. So yeah, I hope that's
quite straightforward. Again, any questions,
any comments, please send them to me. And if you did have a
go at that yourself and were able to complete that,
then a big, well done. A really good use
of tools there. And I will see you
in the next lecture.
38. Section Introduction - Assemblies: In this section, we will learn
how to create assemblies. We will start by modeling
individual parts, including a cast iron
bearing block base, a bearing block cap, and a structural beam, and then we will learn
how to insert fasteners from Autodesk inventors
Content Center. Following that, we
will then create our first assembly file and learn how to add and orientate parts and then constrain
them in place, forming a complete
engineered assembly. Each lecturer is presented
step by step where I demonstrate how we can end up with engineered assembly files. I hope that you
enjoy this section. Again, if you have
any questions, please don't hesitate
to contact me.
39. Part 1 - Cast Body: In this section of the course, we will be working
with assemblies, and we will be learning
how to bring parts together to form an assembly,
such as we see here. So this is the example that we're going to
be working with. In the next few lectures then, we need to draw in these parts. So in this lecture, we will
be drawing in the cast body. Which is this part here.
In the next lecture, we'll draw in the
cap sits on top. And then when we come
to the assembly file, we'll add in these fastness. And we don't actually
need to draw these parts. We can add them in from Autodesk Inventor's
content Library. And I'll show you how to do
that when we do the assembly. But for now, let's focus on
modeling this cast body here. I'll start a new part when a
standard millimeters create. And I'll put the dimensions
of the part here. If you'd like to have
a go at this yourself, by all means, please
feel free to do so. But moving on, I'll be
drawing this part myself, and you can follow
along if you like. So there's quite a lot of
geometries going on here. We'll need to do
several extrusions and use quite a few
other sketch tools. No problem there.
Let's start with the base. Start a new sketch. Go on the Z plane, and I'm just going to
rotate the view cube. See, the default is the
top but rotated by 90. I'm actually going
to turn back 90, this just helps us a little
bit later when we come to using the vertical and
horizontal constraints. We're going to be looking
directly at the top face. Let's go on the rectangle tool, and we'll do this with a
two point center rectangle, so we'll keep the
origin in the center. We'll draw that out. We've
got a wick there of 200. Let's tap on the keyboard, we've got a depth there of 46. Okay, so we could
extrude that now, but I'm also going to include the two slots that we could see. I'm going to choose one
of these slot tools. Now, we've got the
dimension from the center point to the
center point of the slot. So in that case,
it's just easier to use the center to
center slot tool. I draw that in
roughly over here. Though the center to center
distance is ten mil, then the width of
the slot is 12 mil. Now we know that's in
the center position. So I'm going to use the
horizontal constraint, go from that center point, the origin, and then we're going to add in
the dimension there. So from this center
point here to this line, we have a dimension
of 18 millimeters. That's one of our
slots. We need to do the exact same
on the other side. So we could repeat that
process, but in this case, I'm just going to mirror
this sketch across. Let's draw in a
mirror line then. I'm on the line tool now. We're in my mirror
line on a right click, make that a construction line. Come up to the pattern
tools, select mirror. Going to brag across the sketch that I want
to mirror, so my slot. So like the mirror line will
be our center line here. Lo apply done. Now we are fully constrained, as we can see in
the bottom right, and that is looking good. But we can now go
ahead and finish that sketch back to the home view. Really model that's extrude. Now we need to choose
which profile to select. And obviously, we're going to be choosing this profile here. As for the thickness
of this base, it's 14 millimeters as per
the dimension on the drawing. And at this point, I'm going
to start to add a material, so it looks quite nice when
we're working with it. But I choose here cast iron. Next, we need to do the
extrusion in the center. So for this, we're going
to sketch on this plane here and then extrude
across this plane here. Let's left click this
face, create sketch. Then we know the
length of this is 100. So I'm going to use a
midpoint line here. I'm going to start at the midpoint of this
line, which I can see. I've got my green dot there. I drag that across 100. Okay. We've got our line there, and now we need to come
up vertical by 54, use the normal line tool. Endpoint of this
line come up by 54. Okay, then we're coming
across by 100 -40, then divide that by
two. So that's 20. But then coming down by 16
and coming across by six. Then we've got this arc here, which has a rad of 24 mil. So I'm in the line tool, I'm going to come
back to the origin, hold down the left mouse button, and then just drag across, and I'm just going to
draw an arc anywhere. Okay, let go of that. I
come out of the line tool. And now I need to
dimension this arc. The radius in there is 24
mil it's looking nice. We're fully constrained. So yeah, everything is constrained here.
Everything's looking good. And now we need these
lines over the other side. So going to suggest
that we mirror those. Choose the line tool,
draw our line in here and right click
construction line. So like the mirror tool. Then the entities that I
want to mirror are this one, this one, these guys. Choose my mirror line in
the center line here. So apply done. Now we've mirrored
across those parts, and we are fully constrained.
Everything's fixed. That's looking really
good. So at this point, we're ready to extrude
this profile here, finish that two D sketch. Come into the Extrude tool. Okay? So inventor has
selected the right profile. Unfortunately, it's
the wrong direction. We'll flip that direction. And then we want to
extrude to this face here. Okay? We could put
in a dimension here. I'm just going to click two,
then select this face here. Reviews looking
good. Like, Okay. Here we go. That's looking nice. So there's two more
things to add. Number one is the
arced material, which comes around here,
also on the other side here. We've also got to add in
these threaded holes, M 12, thread pitch 1.75. Let's go ahead and add
these arcs in first, so we'll do the sketch on
this plane, create sketch. I'm just going to use
the three point arc tool because we know the
starting point. We know the ending point, and then we know the radius for the drawing that's 50
millimeters, enter. And we need the same
on the other side. Could mirror that if you like. I'm just going to
draw that in myself. 50 millimeters. Okay,
yeah, that's looking good. Now we've got a profile here. I want to make sure that
profile is complete. So I'm just going to
project this line here. We can now see it in yellow. We can see a complete profile
there and also there. Inventors also
projected. These lines, which we don't need, we
can leave them there, but I just delete
them, keep it tidy. Hey, we've got our two
profiles. Finish the sketch. And it's extrude. We need
to select our profile, so we'll select profile
one, profile two. Now we need the distance to come all the
way to this face. So again, I'm going
to extrude two. I'm going to select
this face here. Looking good. Okay, there.
Let's go on the home view. Now there's just one
more feature to add, which are the two holes. We're going to be
drawing these on this, it's the same plane,
but either one of these faces we can choose,
create two D sketch. Now to use the whole tool,
like we've done before, we're going to add
in some points, one point here, one over there. To use a horizontal constraint between that point
and the origin, then with this one
and the origin. And then I'm going to dimension
this line here from this one as 80 mill in the drawing. I just want to make sure
that they are equa spaced. So I'm going to dimension
from here to here. I want that to be half of 80. So we can actually click
this dimension here, so recognize that dimension. And then if we put
the divide sign, then two should be 40, which it is, yeah, perfect. We can also see that we're fully constrained in the corner. We're going to finish
the sketch there. Then we're going to
use the whole tool. The inventors picked up
our two points already. That's great. See what options
we've got available to us. We want this to be
a threaded hole. So yeah, tapped, in this case. We don't need a seat
countersunk or counterbll. Going to go for an
isometric profile. Inventors assigned 12 already, which coincidentally
that's correct. Designation. So we'll go with 1.75 as per the drawing,
so it's a thread pitch. Okay, direction.
That's all good. Termination. We want this
to be fully threaded. So we're input the entire
depth of this part here, which is 54 plus 14. So that's a e. We'll click Okay. Two holes have been made.
They're going through, and they are fully
threaded with that M 12 by 1.75 thread. And that is our cast part. Okay, if you did that by
yourselves, yet a big well done. And we're going to move on
now to the next lecture, which is where we're going to be modeling the cap that sits on top of this cast part here.
I'll see you very shortly.
40. Part 2 - Cap: In the previous lecture, we drew the cast
body just down here. Now let's go ahead
and draw in the cap. We'll start a news part, a standard millimeters create. I'll put in the dimensions here. Again, feel free to have
a go at this yourself. Moving forward, I will continue to have a
go at drawing this. We'll start a two D sketch. In this case, I'm going
to choose the XY plane. We're going to start by drawing the geometry here
and then extruding, and we'll get most of this
part out of one extrusion. But first of all, I'm going
to start at the origin. I'm going to start at the
center point of the arc, which has a radius, in this case, of 24 mils. So I'm going to choose the
arc tool, center point arc, start from the origin
and bring that out to the left by the
radius, which is 24. I'm going to bring
that all the way around and enter 180 degrees. Hey, there we have our arc. I'm just going to use the
horizontal constraint between the endpoint of
this arc and the origin. Now we can see now we're
fully constrained. Let's continue from
the endpoint of the arc here, use the line tool, and come to the
left by six mill, come up vertical 16, left 20. Then up we're going 12. Them we're coming across by a distance we
can't quite tell, but we don't necessarily
need to know. I'm just going to finish
the line at this point, come out of the line tool, and I'm going to input another
arc, a center point arc. We know that this
starts at the origin, and it has a radius of 44. Rest tab on the keyboard, and then when we come
to choose the angle, we're just going to snap
onto this line here, rim away the remainder
of that line. We'll bring that
across until we see the snapping point over
here. That's looking good. I want to trim away
that line tool, trim away the remainder
of the line there. And I just want to make
sure that this point here is horizontally
constrained to this point. There we go. Everything's
fully constrained. Nothing's moving.
Now we just need to mirror across these
various lines here. While drawing,
well, first of all, move some of these dimensions. There we go. I'm going to
draw in a mirror line. So the top quadrant of this arc because it
snaps on in green, and then exactly the same here. Right click construction line. So like the mirror tool on to mirror this
entity. These guys. These guys then the mirror line, this one here, supply done. Can see we're fully constrained, and that's looking
like a good profile. Let's finish the sketch
there on the home view. Let's extrude this profile. I'm going to extrude. I can
extrude it in any direction, prefer to extrude away. Though the length here
the extrusion is 46 mill. Okay. One thing we
need to do here is to add in the arc here
and on the other side, and then we'll extrude
that material. So easy to do. Let's go
into a two D sketch. We'll select this face here. Going to use the arc tool. In this case, we'll use
yet the three point arc. We know the start
point, the endpoint. We also know the radius,
which is 50 mil. You could mirror that
across or in this case, do it manually, start
to end, 50 mil. So we've got the
yellow line here. That's good. We've
got a full profile. Let's project this line as well. There we can see we've got
that full profile or so. Let's finish that sketch. Looks extrude. Going to select this profile,
and this one. Don't want to quite
extrude by that much. So we'll click two. Then we'll select
this face here. And the preview on both sides. We're just extruding
to this face. That's looking
good. So. Next up, we have some
material that's been removed from this area here. We a large arc there
with a rad of 20. Okay, let's go ahead and
start a sketch on this face. I'm going to draw
in two circles, one being 40 and the
other being 40 also. Now I want to distance
between these two at that's 80 millimeters
between the centers and make sure that they are
in the correct position. So I'm going to click from this center of the
circle to the origin. Give that dimension of 80, so I'll click that dimension, divide by two, enter. I'm going to use the
horizontal constraint, center point of this circle, to the center point
of this line here. And now this is the material
that we want to be removing. I've got a three D model. Let's go extrude. Select this profile
and this profile, where we can select
both of them. Fine. We don't want to add
material, we want to remove, and we want to remove material
in the other direction, go in the default direction. And here we'll just
click through all Lo. There we've removed
that material there. Last feature to
add, the two holes. And before I forget, go ahead and assign a
material to this. Let's go for copper. Left click on this face now. I'll start a two D sketch. We'll start a circle. Now
we want the center of this circle to be concentric with the center
point of this circle. So when we move the
mouse over this arc, we'll see the center point pop up, we just snap onto that. And a a diameter of 12, the
same on the other side. Center points popped up, 12, finish the sketch. Extrude, select
those two profiles, and cut, go through all. Make a look at the preview.
That's looking good. Okay. And there we go. There we have the cap. If you did that by yourself,
that's great. And aside from that, we can now move on to putting parts into an assembly file and
understanding how we can orientate them and form
relationships between them. So I'll see you in
the next lecture.
41. Part 3 - Structural Beam: In the previous two lectures, we drew the cast body
and we drew the cap. In this lecture,
we want to draw in an I beam, which
is this part here. Then following this,
we will create an assembly file
where we will input for these pillow blocks on
top of our structural beam. So let's go ahead and
model this H beam. Let's click on a new
part. We're going to a standard mill template. And here we can see the
dimensions for this part, and we'll also add some
fillets to that as well. So let's start a two D sketch. Choose the XY plane, use the line tool, start at the origin, come all the way across
there by 200 mil. It's got a wall thickness
here of five mil. Come back across
97.5 come up by 190. Then come across by 97.5 again. Then up by the wall thickness, five mil, come
across the full 200, come down five, like 97.5, come down 190, cross 97.5. Then finish that with five mil, and there we have the
profile that we need. Let's finish that two D
sketch, go on the home view. Go to three D model. La select the Extrude tool. Inventor selected the correct profile there,
that's looking good. And for this demonstration, we're just going to
extrude that by 1 meter. Let's go on the home view,
previews looking good. Okay. Add in those fillets. In this case, we're going
to use four mill fillets. We're going to fillet
the inner edges. So this one here, turning around on
the other side, this one on the bottom, which is this one.
And this one as well. Okay. Back to the
home view again. Yeah, those fillets
are looking good. Let's also add material to
this, give it an appearance. In this case, let's
go for carbon steel. Make sure we save that part, and we'll be using
that when we come to the assembly file in
the next lecture.
42. Placing & Positioning of Parts: In this lecture, we will create an assembly file and we'll
begin to position our parts, and then later on we'll then constrain them and form
the complete assembly. So let's head up to new. We don't need any parts, but we do need an assembly file. So we've got a range of
templates available here. We're going to go with standard millimeters assembly
template and click Okay. Then from here, we
have a range of tabs and a range of
tools available to us. Now throughout the
following lectures, we won't be covering
absolutely everything here, but we will be covering the fundamentals
behind assemblies, and for this, we're going
to start with the place. If we come up to our dropdown, we have place from
the content center, which we'll be
using today, place imported CAD files
and logic components. This lecture will
focus just on place. The according location of the
parts that you've created. So I'm going to start
with the cast body. I will click that file,
and then you'll see that inventor has thrown
in the cast body, and it's actually locked
that at the origin. So the very first
part that you add to an assembly file will always
be locked to the origin, and then we've got the
option to add more of these. So I could add, as many
of these as we need. Then right click Okay, and then we're left
with four of them. If you do happen to add more
than you need, no worries. Te simply left click on one,
delete, delete, delete. Let's go back into place. Let's place another one of these cast bodies.
We'll press Okay. One thing we can do
here to position this part is that
we can rotate it. So where the mouse is, we see the Y axis. We see the Z axis
and the X axis. If you want to rotate this
in a different position, we can right click
and then we can rotate it around any
one of these axis. For example, if I
rotate around the Y, could then place it
in this position. I rotate around. Let's go for the Z. Okay? So that was vertically mounted and we could do
like so and so forth. So feel free to have
a play around with these and orientate
these, how you like. Okay. Just going to delete
these for the time being. We've got our cast body here. And if we look in the tree
on the left hand side, we can see the
cast body is here, and next to it is this
white filled circle. Now, if that circle
is filled with white, it indicates that this part
is fixed and it cannot move. And we know that because if we hold down the
left mouse button, we cannot move that part.
We can't rotate it. We can't move it around
the environment at all, so it is fixed in its place. I'm going to go up to
view under visual style, and I'm going to turn
on shaded with edges. I like to see edges
during assemblies. I think it's better
for visual purposes. Okay, so we've got one cast
body now go back into place. Okay, let's find the cap. That's okay. And again, now we can rotate
this any way we like. So for example, I could
rotate it around the Y axis, around the z axis, and so forth. So I'm just going to left
click once and add that part. And again, I've got the
option to add more, but I'm just going to press
escape on the keyboard. I'm quite happy with just
one cast body and one cap. Now, this is completely free to move, and that's
absolutely fine. We will constrain that later. But for the time being, I like to roughly move
it into position. Do this, I'm going to come onto the front view on the ViewCube. Just going to move that
across roughly like so. Let's take a look at that.
That's looking good. Let's go on the right view, roughly move that into
the correct position, come back, right, and
then we're going to drop that down later on when
we use constraints. Now notice that on the left side in our tree, like I said, we have a full white circle on the cast body
indicating it is fixed, cannot move, but the cap is
not filled with a white, and therefore we can still move that around that
is not entirely fixed. We'll work on that
in the next lecture. But that is how we add the
parts that we've drawn, and that's how we can rotate them and roughly move them into position using the ViewCube and holding down the
left mouse button.
43. Constraining Parts togethor: Now that we've added in
the cast body and the cap, let's go ahead and
add the final part, just the structural beam, and then we'll start
using constraints to fix everything into position. So let's go up to place and find the location
of the H beam. Okay, I'll open up that
structural beam there. And again, we can just position this anywhere for
the time being. We only need one
of them, so we'll right click Okay, to leave that. That's in the correct
rotation, at least anyway. I'm going to use the
ViewCube to position that a bit more accurately to
where it's supposed to be. There's something like
this on the right view. Move that roughly in position
there. That's looking good. Now, we know that
the cast body here, this cast body is
fixed at the origin. Only the cap and the structural
beam are able to move. We need to put these into position and make
sure they are fixed. And to do that, we use
what's called constrains. But if we come up to the top, we've been using place so far, what's got joint and constrain. This is what we're going to be focusing on in this lecture. So let's select constrain. We have a toolbox pop up here. First of all, let's work
with a structural beam and constrain this
to the cast body. So one of the constraints we
want to have is we want for this face here to be flush
with this face here. But if we come up
into our toolbox under the assembly tab, we need to define the type of
constrain that we're doing. So we've got the mate
options there, angles, got tangent, insert
and geometry. So for this, we're going to
be using the mate option. Okay? We've got here an
option to offset as well, but we don't want any offset between these two
faces being flush. Okay? We then need to
make our selections. So selection number one in blue. I'm going to choose
this face here, and then selection
number two in green. I'm going to choose
this face here. Now, if you notice, that's
not what we're looking for. That is a mate constraint, but we want to be going
for the flush constraints. So under the solution,
we've got mate, so where the faces in
contact with one another, and then we've got the
flush option here, which is when the faces are
flush with one another. So we'll click Apply there. Okay? We know that
this structural beam is still able to move. And if we bring it down here, we can see these two
faces are now flush, and that is a locked constraint. That's good, but
we're still able to give this a lot of movement. Let's make a few changes there. We can do is make these
two faces flush as well. The same process,
select constrain. I'm going to select my
solution here to be flush. Select my first face,
and then the second one. Click Okay. Now, if we
look from the side, we look from the side,
we'll see that is flush, also these two faces
here are flush as well. Looking nice. But we've
still got this movement just in the one axis
there. That's the y axis. So we want to prevent
that from happening. So what we want here is a
mate constraint between this face and this face here that will put
them in contact. Let's come under constraint. Make sure we have mate selected. Select our first face
and our second face. Okay. Now we can see
that's looking good. We're flush here,
these two faces. We're flush on these two faces, and we have a mate
constraint between this face and the underside
of the cast body. Now, if we look on the left
hand side at the tree, we can see that our H beam part now has a white filled circle. And again, just
like the cast body, that means it's
completely fixed. We cannot move that at all. Okay, so that's good.
Those two parts are now fixed in position. Need to constrain the cap. So again, we'll use
the constraint tool. There are various ways
in which we can do this, but I'll show you
quite a simple one. I'm going to use the mate
constraint once again. Okay. And under my
first selection, I'm actually going to choose
the axis of this hole here. So when we come into
contact with the cylinder, we see the axis appear. So we'll select that
once, and we're going to constrain that with
the axis of this hole. So that will make these
two holes concentric. Let's zoom in, and
then we can see the axis of this
hole, left click. Press okay, and let's
see where we are. If I hold down the
left mouse button, I can still move this part. Okay, but I can see that these two holes here
are constrained. As we've achieved what we
wanted there, that's great. Let's do the same then for the other two
holes, this side. Go and constrain. Then we'll
se like that circles axis, and this circles axis, press okay. There we go. That's looking nice. We can see both of
those holes there, they're both concentric with the according holes
in the cast body. Now we've only got
this one piece of movement which we
need to prevent here, so we want the cap to be
sitting in position here. To do this, let's constrain. Let's choose a mate
constraint. Go from this face. Let's select this face here. Okay. Go on to the home
view. There we go. That's looking quite
nice. And then if we look on the
left hand side, we see that the cap now has a white filled circle
indicating that it is fixed. And as I'm holding down
the left mouse button now, I cannot move any
one of these parts. They are all constrained
in position. That's looking good. So in the next lecture, we
will place some more parts, but we're going to place these
from the content center. So these will be the
fasteners that go into these two holes, and
then following that, we'll take a look at patterning this assembly here across
the rest of our eye beam. I'll see you in
the next lecture.
44. Adding Parts from Content Library: In the last lecture,
we added the H beam, and we also then constrained all these three parts together, and all of them are fixed and are in the
according position. And we know that because in the design tree on
the left hand side, we see that each part
here, the cast body, the cap, and the H beam, all have the filled white
circles next to them, so everything is
fully constrained. Now, in this lecture,
we're going to be adding some parts, so some fasteners, in this case, from the content library. So we're going to
come up to the place, click on the dropdown, and then we're going
to select place from content Center or
content library. So this is a content center or library from
Autodesk Inventor, and it has an absolute myriad
of tools available here. Now, some of the parts
we want to add in this example are fastness.
We click on fastness. We then got the option
here for bolts, nuts, pins, rivets, washers. We're going to go in
this case, for a bolt, and then we need to define the type of bolt
that we're after. So we're going to ask
inventor in this case, for a hex head bolt. And under here, we've
got a myriad of bolts, all according to particular
standards and so forth. In this case, we're just going to stick the very first one, AS 210 to metric. Select, Okay. And then if we move the mouse,
we'll have to zoom in. We can see this very
small looking fastener. So that's obviously
not what we need here. We need a 12 mill bolt, and it needs to be
1.75 pitch thread. So what we're going to do
is we're going to right click change the size. So here we're going
to select 12, and then under the
nominal length, we'll go in this case for 60. Okay, we'll press Apply. Then if we see we've
got this 12 bolt. Now, I'm going to
rotate this roughly so it's in the correct position. I'm going to right
click therefore. Now I'm going to rotate
this around the Z axis. Okay, that's the
wrong orientation. So let's rotate that around
the z two more times. Then we see it's in
the correct location. I'm just going to add one here. Then I'll add one over
here. Right click. Okay. Now these fasteners. Now these fasteners are
roughly in position. Let's go on the front view then. Let's roughly position these, bring these guys up here. Then rotate the view cube on the right view and put them in about these
positions here, come back to the home view, we can see they're almost
in the correct location. And from here, we're
just going to use constraints like we did
in the previous lecture. To use the constrain option. We're going to first of
all, select the axis of this bolt, left click. Then we're going
to make that with the axis of this hole here. Looking nice, let's click
Apply. See where we are. Okay, yeah, nicely
constrained there. Add one more constraint, which will be this face
here. It's left click. It's gonna be a
mate constraint to this face here. Like okay. Looking nice, okay? Still got some movement in the movement
there is rotational. We're going to fix
that a bit later. Let's repeat the process
then for this fastener, Constrained, axis to axis. Then I'm going to stay
in the constrained tool, face to face mate. Look, go on the home view. We've got our two
fasteners there, but both of them are still
not fully constrained. We know that because if we
look on the design tree, we can see that that circle is not filled with
a white color. So to do this, let's use the
constraint or once again, but in this case, we're going to use the angle constraint. Though slightly different here, we need to select our solution. We have a directed
angle, undirected, explicit reference vector,
which I very rarely use. Typically, you just use
the directed angle. Very straightforward. You need to make two selections. But here I need to make an angle between a face and another face. I'm going to select this face
here and this face angle, I'm going to leave
that at zero degrees. Click apply and then if we look at this fastener
here in our design tree, we have the white circle,
and it cannot rotate. Holding down my left mouse
button, I cannot move this. I cannot rotate it. That's
fully constrained in position. Unlike the other
one, which we can still rotate, no problem. We're going again do
the exact same process. So we'll go an angle
directed, choose any face. Let's go for this one, and
let's choose this face here. The angle zero.
Okay. We zoom out. You can see we
have white circles of every single
one of our parts. They are all fully
constrained and fixed in position. Well,
that's looking good. So in the next lecture,
the only thing we need to do is to pattern our assembly here
across this eye beam. I'll see you in
the next lecture.
45. Pattern Assemblies: So far, we've added in our recording parts to the assembly. We've constrained them,
and we've also added in fasteners from the
Autodesk content center. Now, the last thing
we need to do by change to this assembly here is just to pattern across three more of our pillow blocks. Well, let's go back
to our assembly. To do this, we're going to
come up to the pattern tools. Got the options to pattern, which is what we'll
select today, can also mirror and also
copy components as well. In this case, we're
going to choose the pattern component. So we've got three tabs here. We've got the associative,
rectangular and circular. Now for this, we're
going to go for a rectangular pattern. So that's just essentially patterning linearly
instead of circular. So first of all, we need
to select our component, make sure that's
highlighted in blue. Then we're going to
come across, and we can either select the parts from the environment
itself or we can come over to our design tree. We can select the cast body. We also want the cap. We don't need to pattern the H beam.
We only need one of those. We do want to pattern the
two fasteners as well. We have all four of
those parts selected. Then we need to choose a column. So this is the linear direction in which we're going to
rectangular pattern. So let's select the
column direction. And from here, we need
to choose an edge. So if I select this edge here, we see this red arrow
pointing in this direction. You can see this
red arrow pointing in this direction off this edge, and this is the
correct orientation that we want to
pattern these parts. However, just for an example, I'm going to choose
this edge here. I'm just going to increase
my pattern distance. Let me just do that by 100. And we can see that's patterning in the wrong orientation, which is in accordance
with the direction of that arrow. No issues at all. We can just flip the direction, and now we're patterning
in the correct direction. So my length of this eye beam is 1,000 millimeters, so 1 meter. I know the width of our pillow
block is 46 millimeters. So if we do 1,000 -46, then we're going to
divide by the number of additional components
we're going to add, which is three, we
come up with 318. And in terms of how many
instances that we want, we want to have an
additional three. That would be four in total, starting with the one
and adding on three, and going by 318 mill, we can accurately
position the last one in the correct position so that these two faces here are flush. If I change that,
let's go over 300. We'll see that it falls short so just a bit of simple mass, and we can end up with the correct number of
pillow blocks that we want, and we're patterning them
at the correct distance. Will we click Okay there? Now if we look in
the design tree, we can see that we have
a component pattern. And if we open
this up, we've got element one, which
is the original. If we open that up,
we've got all four of our parts there so we can go back and edit
any one of these. Element two. So that's
this block here, element three, and
then element four. If we want to
remove the pattern, we can just right click
and select Delete, and then we're left
just back at what we had to start with, okay? And if we control Z, and then bring back
that pattern, like so. Yeah, I hope that makes sense. Yeah, any questions, please post them in the
comment section. And aside from that, I'll
see you in the next lecture.
46. Cross Section Views: So in this lecture,
we will learn how to use cross sectional views. So right here we
have our complete assembly that's looking good. And if we want to apply
a cross sectional view, perhaps we want to see
a bit more detail. Then we can come up to
the tabs at the top. We'll come under the view tab, then come down to visibility. We'll see we've got
a drop down here with some options
for section views. So we've got the
quarter section view, the three quarter section view, and the half section view. The quarter and
the three quarter, I very rarely use those. Very rarely even see
those being used. The half section
view is very common, especially when an
assembly is quite complex. Perhaps we want to see some
more detail in certain areas. So let's come under
the half section view. Left click that once. What we need to do
now is to define the plane or the face that
we're going to section from. So I have a demonstration, I'm just going to select
this face here. Then you'll see
an arrow pops up. We've got a toolbox, as well. So we'll put the
toolbox to the side, but for now, let's
focus on this arrow. If we hold down the
left mouse button and then move the mouse
cursor into the part, you'll see we're creating
our sectional view there. So we're able to see
all that detail that we wouldn't otherwise see if we didn't have the
cross sectional view. We've also got the
option to more accurately position
the section view, so we can use this box here. We know that the width
of this Hbam is 200 mil. So if I enter -100, we'll go to the exact
center of this Hbam. Then if we click Okay, we
can then pan around and see any details that are now more visible than
what were before. If we want to exit
the section view, come back up to the drop down, and we're just going to
select delete section view, and then we're back
to the full assembly. Another thing I
like to show you as well under the
half section view. So if we select that again, I'm going to select
this face here. I'm going to use the toolbox
and enter in -100 again. And then if we select Rotate, we can then actually
use these points to rotate the section view. So just using these points. And we click, Okay, there, we've got quite a unique
section view there. But yeah, I hope
that demonstrates the concept of section views. And again, if we come
up to the drop down, select delete section view back to the full assembly again. I hope that's all clear, and I'll see you in
the next lecture.
47. Visibility & Transparency: In this lecture,
we'll take a look at visibility and transparency. These are two
really useful tools when we're working
with assemblies. So to demonstrate
this, I'm going to work on this cap here. So if we come into
our design tree, we've got our H beam, and we've got our component pattern. If we open that up, we've
got the four elements there. Element one is this small assembly
here that we patterned, element two, three
here, and then four. So if we open up element two, we see each of the
individual parts here. So we've got the two fasteners, the cap, and we've
got the cast body. I want to demonstrate
visibility options on the cap. So if we right click on the
part in the design tree, we've got a whole range of
options available to us. So we can actually
edit that part directly in the assembly,
which is a useful tool. We could open the part file up. We can isolate that
part, for example, O. Breast control z. And if we scroll further down, we'll see two options here. One is visibility and
one's transparency. So visibility has the
shortcut V on the keyboard, and then transparency has
the shortcut T. Right now, the visibility, as we
can see is turned on. If we turn that off, you can then see it's no longer visible. We right click V on the
keyboard, we'll come back. A if we right click and
then hit T on the keyboard, so change its transparency. You can then see that that
cap has become transparent, and we've got a
better view there, in this case, of the fastness. I come back to the home view. I want to turn the
transparency off, right click on that part, down, it the transparency there, or hit T on the keyboard, so that's how we change our parts visibility
or transparency, and I'll see you in
the next lecture.
48. Editing Existing Assemblies: In this lecture, we will look
at how to edit assemblies. So far we've made
plenty of constraints. Let's look at how we can
change them if we need to. So to make this a bit easier, I'm going to delete our
pattern that we did. Instead, we've just
got a list here in the design tree of our individual parts
that we began with. Let's take a look at the let's go with the structural
beam then, so the H beam. We want to edit any of the
constraints about this, we can select the
plus next to it, and then we can see
it's model states, which we won't be
covering in this course. We can see the origin, okay? So relating to the Hbam we can see where
the Y Z plane is, the X Z, and the X Y. We can also see the
three axes as well, X Y and Z, can also see where the origin is from
this original part file. Then we have these
three items below, which are the constraints
that we applied. If we select, let's say, flash one, we can see a
blue face and a green face. These were the two
faces that were constrained together
as a flash constraint. See what flash two is? That was the blue and
the green face here. These two faces being flush, and then we made a mate
between the top, the top face. So in this case, it's
green and the blue face, which we can't quite see here, but it's the bottom
of the cast part. Now if we want to edit
those or remove them, we can just simply right
click and select Delete. That'd be deleting that
constraint, therefore, we can then move that
part once again. Press Controls Ed. We can also edit that
constraint as well. So we've got delete, and
we can then edit that. We go back into our options menu here and make any changes. We can make that offset, let's say 15 millimeters plus okay. Now we've got that
15 mil offset. And we can do that for any one of the other parts as well. So if we come into
the fasteners, in this goes this fastener here, we've got the three
according mates there. So the concentric mate, the face to face mate, and then the angular mate with this face here
at zero degrees. We can also choose
to suppress a mate. If I right click flush one of the H beam and suppress that, then temporarily, that
constraint will be suppressed. But as soon as we
click that once again, okay, there would
then be an action. And so, yeah, please do use those tools in the design tree. You can see our constraints. We can edit or delete them,
and so forth from there. I'll see you in
the next lecture.
49. Section Introduction - 2D Engineering Drawings: In this section, we will
learn how to create two D engineering drawings
using a broad range of tools to convey
detailed information such as geometries,
dimensions, and tolerances. These drawing blueprints
can be used to communicate design details to production
teams and clients. We'll start by taking a look at templates and customizing
two D drawings, followed by view types,
angle projections, view styles, and labels, dimensions and style
modifications. We'll also take a look at adding parts lists and customizing
title blocks as well. These are all the
essential elements to building two D drawings. Finally, I will demonstrate a complete two D
engineering drawing for the bearing Mount assembly that we created in the
previous section. Each lecture is
presented step by step, so I'll walk you through
how we can utilize the drawing tools for
professional communication. To D engineering drawings are critical for prototyping
and production, and after the
following lectures, you will be able to
create customized professional TD
engineering drawings. I hope that you
enjoy this session. Again, if you have
any questions, please don't hesitate
to contact me. I'll see you in
the next lecture.
50. Adding Sheet & Customising Them: In this lecture, we'll move on to two D engineering drawings. So we'll take a look at
templates, first of all, then we'll look at
how to add sheets to a drawing and how
to customize them. So right now, I'm
on the home screen. If we come over to new Okay, so we don't need a new
part or a new assembly, but we do need a new drawing. So there are many default
templates available here. I do have a lecture in
this section on how to create your own custom
two D drawing template. So do check that out, I'll give you a lot
more detail there. But for the purposes
of this lecture, we're going to go ahead and
select the ISO dot DWG. Now, there's also at IDW, ISO file as well. Key difference between these, at DWG is more cross compatible with
other Autodesk softwares, such as Fusion 360 or AutoCad, and I generally always go
with the dot DWG templates. So let's choose
ISO, click Create. And now we're coming over to the two D engineering drawing. So this we have
here is one sheet. Now, if we come over
to the model tree, we'll see we've only
got one sheet here. We can choose to
add more sheets by right clicking,
selecting new sheet. Okay? So if I add another two, we've then got a total
of three sheets. Another one in white
here is highlighted. This is the one they're
currently looking at. If we want to change, we'll double click on another sheet. Now on sheet one, sheet
two, and sheet three. So how can we customize these? What we can do is
to right click on them and then click Edit Sheet. So here we can give it a name, for example, this would typically
be an assembly drawing. We can customize the size, I typically draw in A three, but by all means, feel free to change the size as you need. In terms of the orientation, we can change between a
portrait sheet. If I click? Okay, there, we've got that
A three portrait sheet. Just go back to landscape. And we've also got
the option there to change where the title block is. The title block is this
element down here. Now, that's currently in
the bottom right corner. We can move that top left, top right, top left,
and the bottom left. I normally have it
in the bottom right, so I'll keep it like that. That's okay. You see we've
got this border here, so we've got six
zones by four zones. Now we can edit that by coming
into drawing resources. If we come under
the borders folder, open that up, we've then
got the default border, which is what we're
looking at here. If we right click
on that, we can insert a new drawing border, and press yes to this,
so it's essentially replacing this current
border we're looking at. And then we can define
the number of zones. So if I change the number of horizontal zones,
let's just double that. Let's go 12 in vertical zones. Again, let's just double
that. Let's go eight. And then we have the option
to define if they're so A, B, CD, et cetera, or numeric or none, for both the horizontal
and the vertical. So I've changed to 12 and eight. Let's see what happens
when I click Okay, there we have the
12 zones at the top and the eight zones on
the vertical there. So that's the basics for adding sheets and then
customizing them. And in the next
couple of lectures, we'll be taking a look at
how to add our models. I'll also include the
lecture specifically on how to customize and modify and
create your own title block.
51. Base Views, Projected Views & Section Views: So now we are in our two
D drawing environment. And in this lecture,
we're going to focus on adding a base view, how to add projected
views from the base view. Also, we're going
to take a look at section views and
detail views as well. So let's go ahead
and add a base view. If we come up to the top where the tabs are under place views, we've got the
option there to add a base view. So
let's select that. As we can see here,
inventor has automatically selected the assembly that we worked on in the
previous section. And that's because
I've actually got that part open, which
is just down here. Okay? But if you want
to show a base view of an existing part or assembly and you haven't got it
open, there's no problem. We can just open an existing
file, this option here, select its according place, and then if we just select Okay after that, it will appear. Now, we've got a few options
here that we can change. We're going to visit these in a later lecture, but for now, let's just click Okay,
let's have our base view. We can move this
around the sheet, so if we hover over the view, make sure the border is visible, hop down the left mouse button, and we can move it like so. I'm going to place
that here for now. So that's how we
had a base view. It's very
straightforward. And now we're going to move on
to the projected views. So a projected view
is a view that has been projected
from an existing view. So if we come up to
our place views again, we'll go on projected view. We then need to select
the view to project from. So in this case, in this
example, I use the base view. And as we move the mouse
around the base view, we can see all these
different projections. So a top view, got an IO view, side view, bottom
view, and so forth. Let's go ahead and
add a side view. I think that's
quite important to identify where those
bearings sit on this H beam. Once we're happy with the
position, left click once. And then we're still
in the projected mode, so you can go ahead and add
in any other views you want. You want to add an
IO or a top view. When you're finished
adding your views, just right click
and select Create, and there we have our side view. Now, again, we can move this. So if we hover over it, hold down the left mouse button, we can only move
it side to side. We cannot move it up and down. And that's because there's
a fixed alignment, this existing
relationship between the base view and the side view. It's very rare to
break that alignment, but if you do need to do so, we just double left
click on the side view, come up to the display options, then we untick align to base. Okay. Then if I hold down
the left mouse button, you see I can move this
anywhere on the page. Going to press Control Z because it's quite important
to have that alignment between the two when we're
showing the side view and relationships between
the base and the side view. So that's how we had
the projected views. It's nice and simple. And now we're going to take
a look at section views. So again, we come
up to place views. If we select the section view, I'm going to add in a
section of this part here, which isn't really necessary, but for the purposes
of this lecture, I'm going to use this view. So first of all,
we need to select a view to do a
section view from. I'm going to choos a side
view, left click once. And now my cursor has changed to a cross and then I need to identify the
start of my section view, so we can see we can
actually select midpoints, endpoints of lines and so forth. So for this example,
I'm going to hover over the midpoint of this line here and I'm going to
extend my mouse out. We can see we've
got that alignment there to the center
point of the line. I'm going to show you
why I'm doing this after or left click once, and now I need to select
the end of my section view. So in this case,
I want the end to be in alignment with the
midpoint of this line. I'm also going to track
that out left click once. Now we've got the option
if we want to add any more sort of angles to change
that section view. But in this case, if
we don't want to, we're going to right click
and select Continue. Now, if we hover above
our section view line, we're looking up essentially from where we drew that line. If we bring the mouse
down below the line, we're then looking
down, essentially. Now, we wouldn't do
this for the assembly, but just for pups of demonstration known
to LefClickOce here, and then we can see
our section view. So from this line here, which is labeled A A,
we're then looking up. And you can see why we
started the section line away from this line
here because we don't want any of this detail of the section line or labeling to be conflicting with
our existing entities of the side view. That's the basics of how
to show a section view. We would only do these
where detail is necessary, such as some detail being
hidden within an assembly or a part in which we can only see it by doing a section view. And the last tool I
want to show you in this lecture is the detail view. And again, for this assembly,
it's not necessary, but let's go ahead
and demonstrate that by selecting the
detail tool here. We need to select the view. So in this case, I'm going
to select the base view. And then if we zoom in,
which in this case, I'm going to choose the
center of this circle, and I'm going to
draw out a circle. And then when I'm
happy with that, I'm going to left click once. You'll see there we've
got this preview, left click again, and there
we have our detail view. So it's labeled as view B, and then we've got
the view B up here. So that is the basics of
how to add a base view, how to add projected views, section views, and detail views. And then the next lecture,
we'll be looking at how to switch between first and
third angle projections. So I'll see you there.
52. Switch Between 1st & 3rd Angle Projections: In this lecture, we will
learn how to switch between first and third
angle projections. So to demonstrate this, I'm
going to add in a base view. So come under my place
views, select base. And I'm going to go
ahead with the assembly that we did in the
previous lecture. I'm going to select Okay, move that just down to the left. And now I'm going to add in
a projected view of this, which will be an IOview. So I'll select the
projected view and select my base view, and then I'm going to project
the ISO view like so. So I'll left click once, then
I'm going to right click. Select Create. There we
have our ISO view here. Now, we can tell that this is
in first angle projection. So if we want to
switch to third angle, I'm just going to select
both of these views, press delete on the
keyboard, confirm that. And then I'm going to
come up to manage, and we need to go under
the styles editor. So we have a lot of options here to edit different styles. We're going to be
covering the core of these throughout the
remainder of this course. But for the purposes of
first to third angle, we're going to come
under standard, come under our
default standard ISO. We're going to come
under view preferences. And then just in the
bottom near the center, we've got the projection type. We've got first angle
and third angle. Currently, first
angle is highlighted. In this case, I'm going
to switch to third angle. So that's now highlighted. Click Save and Close. For as many sheets as I
have on this drawing, they will always show the
third angle projection. Let's go back to place views. Let's add in that
base view again. Let's select Okay. Move
that view down there. Go to the projected view, and then I'll put in
my ISO view there, right click Create,
and there we can see we're now working in
third angle projection. And you can switch between those vice versa using
the same method. So for the remainder
of this course, I will be working in
third angle projection, but please use the according
angle projection as per what's required by your client or your
lecturer and so forth. And then the next
lecture, we'll be taking a look at view styles, labels, and leaders.
I'll see you there.
53. View Styles, Labels & Leaders: In this lecture, we
will learn how to modify view styles and labels. So to demonstrate this, I
will input a base view of the assembly we've been working on so far, and I'll click Okay. I'm also going to add
in a projected view. So let's add in a
side view there. I'll click Projected.
Select My view, then move the mouse to the side. Left click once,
right click Create, and there we have a base
view and a side view. Now, I want to reduce the
size of these because they're a bit too big
for the sheet size. So to do this, I'll double left click on the border
of my base view, I'll take the scale down. So let's make that one to five. Okay. Now we can
see the base view. It's a scale of one to five, and so is the side view. And that's because
there is a relationship between these two
in terms of scale. Now, it's very rare
that you would want a projection to be of
a different scale. But if you ever do need to
do that, I'll show you how. So if we want the scale of the
side view to be different, again, double left click. Now we see that the
scale is grade out. We're unable to modify that. That's because that relationship is in place between
the two views. Now we can remove
that relationship. But if we untok this box, we've then got the option
to change the scale. So if I say this is one to eight as an exaggeration, click Okay. We can now see the
difference in the scales. So I'm going to put that
back to scale from base, that will put it
back to one to five, keep those two views
the same scale. Now for the front view, we can add a label
to identify that. So now if we go under label, so just above scale and
the view identifier, let's type in front view. And then we just need
to make sure that this light bulb is on. So if we left click once, light bulb on, it shows the
visibility. Press Okay. Now we've got this label above. We hold down the
left mouse button. We can position that
wherever we like. So I typically have it
underneath the model. It's looking good. So we'll
see it now says front view, which is the view identifier, and then it's got the
scale in brackets. We can modify this how we
need by double left clicking, and then we can add any text
in here or any properties. So we've got the scale in there, which we don't really need,
so I'm going to remove that. Click Okay. And now I
see that we've just got the view identifier in
there, reposition there. Now the reason I
took the scale out is because in a later lecture, when we take a look at how to
customize the title block, I will show you how to input the scale in the title block, and it will automatically detect what the scale
is of your models. So it's referenced in
this title block here, so we don't need to
repeat that information. Let's go ahead and do the
same for the side view, then that will left
click identifier. Let's go sideview. Then the light bulb on. Press Okay, reposition that. And again, I'm just going
to remove the scale there. That's looking good. I'm just going to move
these down a bit. Another option that we've
got if we double click on our views is the styles
at the top here. But to demonstrate
this, I'm going to input another projection
of the base view, select projected,
select the base view. I'm going to project the
IoviewR click Create. Put this over in the corner. Now this is far too large. So I'm going to double click
on this. I'll input a scale. Let's go for one to eight. I'll also input identifier. Let's go Ioview, turn that on. We can also edit the label
using this button here. We click that go to
remove the scale. Okay. Press o again. And there, that's a much
more suitable size, and I'm just going
to move the label to a more appropriate
position like so. Now, if we double
click on the IO view, again, we've got
these style options. So I think it's best to
demonstrate on this view here. The very first style we
have is hidden lines. But the opposite of that here, which is hidden lines removed. So if we select hidden
line and then press Okay, all of the hidden
lines will be shown. We can see here the
slots are going through. We can see here the underside
of the H beam and so forth. Now for this assembly, it's
quite straightforward, so it's not really necessary
to have the hidden lines. So for this particular assembly, I'll put the hidden
lines as removed. One more style I'd like to
show you is the shaded option. So if we select shaded
and then click Okay, we can now see that
the appearance, as per the appearance
and material that we assigned when we drew the
individual parts is now shown. And this, for me, I
think, just helps better communicate with a lien
or anybody in production, manufacture each
individual part there. But not strictly necessary, but I tend to do it
in most of my models. And so that is a
summary of how to use the view styles and
how to add labels. I hope that all makes sense, and I will see you in the next lecture where
we will be adding dimensions and style
modifications. I'll see you there.
54. Adding Dimensions & Style Modifications: In this lecture, we'll
learn how to add basic dimensions and do
some style modifications. So I'm going to go ahead
and add a base view again, and I'm going to also
add a side view. There is a quick way of
doing this, by the way. So instead of coming
up to projected view, what we can do is just double
click on the base view, then we can click these
arrows to the side here. So that will give
us a side view. So it will give us a top view, the other side, bottom view. We can add the ISO view other views like
so, you click Okay. We've got all of those views, which as a bit too much going to control Z those
that we don't need. Put these into a
better position, and I'm going to modify
the scale again. Double left click,
change that scale. Let's go one to five. Now
for this assembly drawing, it's essential that we
identify where each of these bearing blocks are
in relation to the H beam. So to do this, we need to
use the dimension tool. So if we come up to our
tabs, come under annotate. We have the dimension
tool here and a series of other
dimension tools. Now, the key dimension tool is the most commonly used one, but we're also take a
look at baseline as well. Let's select the dimension
tool very straightforward. If we want to identify
the position of this bearing block to
the start of the H beam, we can just left click once
at the start of the beam. And then if we come across and left like start of
the bearing block, we'll see a dimension appear. So that relationship
between these two lines, we can left click once again and input that dimension there. Do the same for the third
bearing block, also the fourth. So we're still in
the dimension tool. Left click once again on
the end of the H beam, Camacross, left click
on the third block. But that interposition do exactly the same
process there for the fourth block, that
interposition there. Believe the dimension tool, we can right click
and select Okay. Now, that's a bit of a long
winded way of doing it. I show you a bit of a shortcut. So if I left click
once and delete these, the best tool or
most appropriate at least to use here is
the baseline tool. So by means of a baseline, we select where the baseline is. So we're going to reference
this entity here, and then we can select as many
other entities as we want. For example, choose
our three starts of the bearing blocks. Right click, press Continue, and then we see
each of these are referenced from the baseline
that we chose here. I'll input those
dimensions there. Good. Right click Done. So now the team in
assembly will understand the exact position of each
of these bearing blocks. So these dimensions
here, 318, 636 and 954, each one of them is using a
comma as the decimal marker, and they're followed
by two decimal places. We can edit these by
coming into manage, and then we're going to go
under the styles editor again. Now when our box pops up, we're going to come down
to the dimension here. Click the plus and
then come down to the default Iodimensions. And in here, we can
modify the units. So the units here, going to
leave those as millimeters. Under the decimal marker, I want to change those
from a comma to a period. And then under the linear units, we've got the option to
change the precision. So right now we've got
two decimal places. Let's change that. In this case, let's just
change them to one. Click Save and Close. Now we can see that
our decimal marker is a period and that we've only got one decimal
place per each dimension. And that will be apparent on as many sheets as
we add in here. So no need to repeat
the process later on. I'd like to show
you as well, about the whole dimension tool. For this, I'm going to
right click in my tree, and I'm going to
add a new sheet, then I'm going to
input a base view. But in this case,
instead of the assembly, I'm going to demonstrate
using the cast body. Make that a bit bigger in
scale. Let's go one to one. Let's also add a top view there. This will be the view that we'll work on for this demonstration. So this is an example
in the base view here of where the hidden lines
are actually quite useful. You know, it tells us that
these holes are through, and also tells us that these
slots are through, as well. The one more tool I
like to show you is the hole and thread
dimension annotation. So to do this, I'm going to select our threaded holes here. So I'll left click
on that circle. Then we can bring that out. Let's just say here. And now inventor has picked up that
this is a threaded hole. That's got an M 12
by thread pitch 1.7 5-6 H. That's very useful when it comes
to threaded holes. An inventor will just
pick up that information instead of us having to
manually input that later. And there are a few other
dimension annotations that we're going to take a look at throughout
this course. Be covering those
in a lecture later. So those are the
basics of how to use the dimension tools
and how to modify styles so that we can change the decimal period and the
number of decimal points. And in the next lecture, we'll be taking a look at how to add a parts list to an assembly sheet and
also how to add balloons, as well. So I'll see you there.
55. Adding Tolerances: In the previous lecture, we
learn how to add dimensions, and in this lecture, we'll
learn how to add tolerances. So to demonstrate this, I'm
going to input a base view, and I'm going to go ahead
and select the cast body. So if you haven't got this part open, like I've got it here, then make sure to open an existing file and
locate the according part. Change the scale
of this so it's a bit larger, easier to see. Let's go one to one. Let's also turn off the hidden lines. So we'll go hidden
lines removed, go okay. Now, let's go ahead and
add in a dimension, and then we'll add in
a tolerance to that. So again, under the tabs, let's select annotate,
come under dimension. And let's dimension the
width of this part. So 200 mil. Now, this could be considered to be a bit of
a critical dimension in that we don't want the width of our bearing block to be wider than the eight
inch eye beam. So eight inch, 200 mil. If we have our 200
mil as a maximum, and perhaps we could deviate
slightly lower than that. That's in but a tolerance, then. So let's double click
on the dimension. Then we have our toolbox pop up. Okay, so B and text come under
precision and tolerance. And here, we've
got the option to add different tolerance methods. So, for example, quite a common
one to use is symmetric. We could put a
symmetric tolerance on that for steel. Let's go 0.2. If we click Okay, we'll then see that we've
got the dimension, so 200 mil and it can
tolerate plus or -0.2. So I could go to
200.2 or to 199.8. However, we don't want this
dimension to be over 200 mil, so we want that under
eight inch to ensure that it sits nicely on the H beam. But let's see what other
tolerance types we've got. One I would tend to
use here is deviation. Okay? So here we input an
upper tolerance and a lower. So we don't want this
to be larger than 200, so let's put in a
tolerance of zero. And for the lower, yeah, we could tolerate let's go 40.3. We click Okay. We can then see there we've
got the dimension. We can tolerate no more, so we cannot go higher than 200, but we can deviate
down to 199.7 mill. Other options exist here and feel free to have a
play around with these. So we can put in limits stacked. So in here, we literally
show the higher value, so the upper tolerance
and the lower tolerance. It's got linear, as well, which are very
rarely see this one. Now, we can put a max, and here we're not
stating a minimum. So in this particular case, the manufacturers would refer
to a general tolerance. So we can add in one of these as an example by adding
in some text. Okay, let's put that up
here. Title that notes. Let's put in a general
linear tolerance. I'm going to use one
of these symbols. Let's use the plus
and minus symbol. Let's go not 0.2, and let's put a
angular tolerance. Let's go two, and then
we want another symbol, which is our degrees
symbol. It's okay. So what we're conveying
in this drawing is that the general linear
tolerance is plus or -0.2, which is applicable
in this case, because this is a
linear tolerance. However, we've then
overrided that by stating that
200 is a maximum, and so a minimum, in this
case, would be 199.8. We've also got the
option as well to add in a minimum can state, yeah, 200 minimum,
which in this case, we wouldn't want to do, but
just as another option there. So feel free to have
a play around with these most common ones that
I use, at least anyway, deviation and
symmetric, as well, if that deviates from a general linear tolerance or a general angular tolerance. I hope that all makes
sense. And again, any questions, please
send them to me. But aside from that, I will
see you in the next lecture.
56. Adding Parts Lists & Ballons: In this lecture, we
will learn how to add a parts list and also balloons. Though, as we can see here,
I've input three views, so we've got the base
view, a side view, and an IO view.
They'll have labels. I'm referencing here a scale
for this particular view. We've also got the
dimensions in place as well. So it's quite critical here
that we add in a parts list to identify every part
that's in this assembly. So to do this, let's come up to the top under the tab annotate. And if we come all the
way across under tables, we can add in a parts list. Let's left click on this one. And here we've got
our toolbox where we need to select a view. So in this case, I'm going to
select the base view, okay? So that's just a reference
to the assembly itself. Leave everything else as
the default, select Okay. Then we've got this parts list. Here, I'm just going to
place that up here for now. Got a whole series
of information here. So we've got the item number, so one, two, three, four. The quantity of the
according item, it's reference part number
and also description. I'm going to make this
a bit more tidy by dragging out the edge
of the box there. It's likely that in your case, you won't have any information under part number
and description. But we'll take a look
at how we do that now. Drag in this side of
the box, like so. So if we want to
add a part number for each of these parts, so we've got the H beam
here, the pillow block, body, the bearing cap, and then the bolts, let's go
into the bearing block body. So to do this, we can just quickly double click
the description here, it will jump straight
into the part itself. Now to add a part
number and description, we're going to come up to file. Going to come down
to I properties. Then here we can come under
the tabs project and status. Let's go into project first. Here we can add a part number. So if I change this,
let's go one, two, three, four, five, six, I'll leave the description
as the same. Click Apply close. And if we come back
into our two D drawing, we can then see we've
got the addition of one, two, three, four, five, six
on that particular part. So you can edit the
part number there, and also the description. Let's go back into You can also add in additional
properties as well, stock numbers, project
engineer, authority, et cetera, come under status, who was checked by
the checked date. We'll be coming back
to this when we attend the lecture on how to
customize the title block. Okay? But in terms of part
number and description, we've covered those,
and then also want to just quickly
reference material. We've added in a material here, so cast iron and an appearance,
which is great iron. Now let's say that we want
to show the material. We come up to parts
list and double click. A toolbox pops up. Then we can select
the first icon here, which is a column chooser. If we select that, we've got
another toolbox popping up. If we scroll down,
we select material, like add, like, Okay, apply, Okay. Drag that out. Now we can see that we're
showing the materials. So you can add as much
information as you want under your parts list. But for this
particular assembly, I think the information
shown here is adequate. I'm going to hold down
the left mouse button, and I'm going to dock that, so we'll snap into the corner like so. I'll dock that there. So in our parts list, we're identifying the four
individual parts, the according properties
related information. But we're not actually
showing where these parts are in our views. And to do this, we need
to add in balloons. So again, under the tab anoty, come all the way
across to balloons, it's a shortcut B
on the keyboard. Select that and then we can
start with item number one, which is the H beam. We're just going to
click once on that part. Going to drag out the balloon, left click again, and
right click, continue. Now we're identifying
item number one. Item number two is
the pillow block or the bearing block.
Left click there. Number two, right
click, continue. Item number three, that's the bearing cap and identify that in this view
here is most appropriate. Place that there, continue. Then item number four
is the fastener. That I select the fastener, bring that balloon
out, continue. Now we've identified every
part within our assembly. We can tidy these
up a little bit. Cancel. Let's get
out of the balloon. So we can select the
balloon number one, hold down Control
on the keyboard, and then left click
balloon number two. We can align these.
So if we right click and align these
balloons vertically. So I'll input. There.
It's looking nice. We can do these horizontally. Left click, hold down Control, left click, right click line. Go for a horizontal
alignment here, input those roughly
here. Looking nice. That's how we add parts list, fill in the information, change any of the columns, and also to identify each part within our assembly
using balloons. In the next lecture,
I will complete the two D engineering drawing for this entire
assembly and each of its parts. I'll
see you there.
57. Project 7 - 2D Engineering Drawing Bearing Block Assembly: In this lecture,
I'll be using all of the tools that we have learned
in the previous lectures in order to complete
an entire two D engineering drawing for this
assembly and its parts. So the very first
sheet is the assembly. Second sheet is the H beam. Third sheet is the
bearing block. The last sheet is
of the bearing cap. So let's start with
the assembly sheet. First of all, I'm
going to click New. I'm going to select an
appropriate drawing. In this case, I'll
just use the default So dot dwg create. I'm happy with the
size being A three, the border as well,
and the title block. I do need to add in a
few more sheets, though. I'm going to rename these, so sheet one, edit, call that the
assembly. Sheet two. Let's call that the H beam. Sheet three is the
bearing block. And Set four is the bearing app. Okay, so we're on the
assembly sheet right now. Let's go ahead and add that in. I'm going to select
base. I select the part. So I've already got
it open down here. So my assembly gonna
put in a side view, and let's go for an
IO view as well. I'm gonna change
the scale there. Let's go one to five. Okay. Now, if we see we're
still in first angle, it's not what we want here. I'm going to go to
manage styles Editor. Going to come into my standard default standard ISO
view preferences, select third angle,
save and clothes, re input those views. Side view over there. I'm
going to rescale this. Let's go one to eight. Nice. Let's change the
style of that view. Let's go shaded. Let's type
in here an identifier. Let's go ISO view, turn that on. I'm going to keep the scale there because it's
different from the default position
the label there. Let's do the same for this view. That down there. Same
for the side view. Let's go ahead and ads
in some dimensions. Let's do a baseline. One, two, three, Okay? Nice. Go ahead and
add a parts list, select that base for you, leave everything as
default, place that there. I want to add in the
material, column chooser. Go on the material,
add ok, applying nice. Let's tidy that up a bit. Now let's add in some
balloons. Balloon one. Make these aligned. Let's go the
horizontal alignment. Okay. Let's do the
same for these two. So control, click both align,
go vertical alignment. I want to change my styles here, I want to use a decimal point. One decimal place
is only required. Go in the dimension, default, period, one decimal place. Save. That's looking good. Okay, so that's it
for the assembly. Now move on to the H
beam place views, base. I go to select my H beam, structural beam, but
in the base view, the front view, but
in a side view. Let's go with an IO as well. Keep the ratio one to five. Reposition those.
Change the scale there. Let's go up for one
for eight again. Pull that ISO and that on. We're going to leave
the scale in there. Position that. Change
the style as well. Let's go shaded. Move
that down slightly. Add in the front view. In the side view label. Take out that scale as well. You need to add in
some dimensions here. Let's go into
annotate dimension. We can just select
this one line here. We got the length
of our eye beam, which in this case, is
1,000 mil or 1 meter. Let's go from the
top to the bottom, give that an overall height, 200 mil or eight inch. Let's also identify
the thickness here. Let's also put in a AD as well. So for the radius here, we can just select on the RAD. Then we'll see the dimension
appears with an R in front of it indicating
radius four mil. Now, I beam is purchased or H beam is purchased
in standard sizing. So you just go for
eight inch I beam, and the dimensions
would be according to however they're manufactured. So you wouldn't typically
state such dimensions here. But for the purposes
of this lecture, I'll add them in anyway. And let's also dimension
the width here. Let's go over 200. Okay. That's looking good. Now let's go on to
the bearing block, place views, base, cast
body, in this case. I'm going to change
the scale there. Let's go one to two. Looking nice. Let's project
that. Double left click. Select the arrow there.
Let's put in an IO as well. We also need a top
view because there's quite a lot of detail
which we're showing here. Arrange this IO first. Let's go shaded.
Call that IO view. We don't need to show
the scale here because we're going to leave that
as a ratio of one to two, and that's aligned
then with the base, the side, and the top view. Change the style of that shaded. Looking nice. Add a
label to the top view. Top view. Then the
light bulb on. Okay. No keep that to
the top. Side view. I don't want to show
the hidden lines here, so I'll select that view. Click off the style from base. We're just hidden lines removed. I want to keep the hidden
lines in here, mind. Now we can go ahead and start
adding some dimensions. So let's go to
annotate dimension. Start with the si view first. Here, we're going to
add in this dimension. So 54 mil. Going to add in the 14 mil here. A going to go for the
with 46, that label. Again, go on dimension tool. Let's start with our front view. Let's do a total
length of this 200. I want to indicate the
center line of these slots. So to do that, we're
going to use a new tool, which is the center
line bisector. If we select this, then select one end of our
slot and the other one, got the center line up here, repeat the process
via the other side. And then I want to dimension between these two center lines. Bring that down
154 looking good. I also want to show
a center line for this arc to do that. Let's select the center mark, like so looking nice. Again, we'll dimension this. Let's dimension the RAD. Put that in there.
Yeah, 24 radius, okay. Dimension this height, 16. Now, I don't like
that 16 being there. It's not too visible. So I'm gonna hold down
the left mouse button, and I'm actually going
to drag the dimension away.'s position
that roughly there, maybe pull this in slightly. That dimension back like so. I want to add in a center line as well for these
through holes here. So let's go on the
center line bisector. L two inner lines on both sides. Let's put in a dimension between these center lines. At mil. That snaps in place
looking good. Let's come into
the top view now. Now, same for the holes, I want to add in
some center marks, so I'll left click
once there here. Also on the arcs of
the slots like soap. Come back to the dimension
tool. Start with the slots. So we'll do the
width of these 12, do the distance from
the center line of this arc to the
sight line here 18, tidy that up, so I'm going to hold down left mouse button, move that dimension
there much more visible. I want to use the hole and
thread dimension tool and then select the hole here,
that identifier there. So 12, 1.75 thread pitch
dash 68, right click. Okay. Let's go ahead now and let's
move this out the way. Let's add in a dimension between these two outer vertical
lines. I'll be 60. Let's go between the
endpoint of this arc to the endpoint of
this arc 1,000.2. Let's now input a ad
on this arc here. Let's come out radius 50. We also need to define as
well the width of the slot. In this case, it's ten mil. Move that dimension out a bit more tidy.
That's looking good. And then we can
dimension as well. This drop or recess, six mil. A move that dimension
out looking nice. That's looking good. Let's
move on to the last sheet, which is the bearing cap. Again, place views, pace. Let's go on the cap ratio here. Let's go for one to one. Keep the hidden lines in there, double click, add
in a side view. Also an ISO view. Let's go for a top view as well. There's quite a bit of
detail going on here. Do the ISO view first. Et's work on the
front view from here. So quite a few
dimensions to add. Let's go annotate dimension. Start with this
distance here. 12 mill. Then need to define from
here to here, which is 20. Need to put in the center
line for the through holes. Use the bisector center line. These two, these two I got a
dimension between these two. Should be 80 mill, that's right. Dimension between
the center line and the beginning of
this arc six mil. Move that dimension
over slightly. Then you add a radius here, 24 mil Alsd this arc here, add in the center
line for this arc. Then let's just add
the last dimension, which is this line
here, six mil. Looking good for the front view. Let's move on to the top view, so we'll put a label in there. Actually we keep that up there. Let's go dimension.
These through holes. You need to put a center
line on those, one, two, looking good, adding
some more dimensions then. So we've got this arc here, which is a Rd of 50. Then we also need to
identify this rat here, which is, in this case, it's 20. We don't need to show
the hidden lines here. I don't think they
bring too much value. So in that case, I'm going to
remove the style from base, remove the hidden lines, press o Looking good. Let's finish off
with the side view, double click. Go
on the dimension. Let's give the depth at
width, in this case. Let's also give the
distance here 16 mill. And let's remove these
hidden lines as well, remove the link, burn
off the hidden lines. And there we have
the bearing cap. So just so that you're aware of all the
dimensions I put in, I am referencing the PDF that
I showed you at the start. So normally it would take me
a bit more time to do this, but I'm just quickly doing that for the purposes
of this lecture. But there we have the entire to the engineering drawing
for this assembly here. Or assembly drawing, identifying each one of the parts,
the according details, and then we go into
each individual part, identifying those dimensions,
any relevant details there. We can also add
some text as well. So for example, under
the bearing block, if this is cast, we might
want to add some text. So shortcut T on the keyboard. So if we can put
in some text here, let's say, I don't
know, no shaft edges, et cetera, et cetera. Okay. We can modify that text
by double left clicking, selecting that, and then we can change any of the
properties here, so we can make that five. Well, we can change
the font for us, okay. And we've got some quite exaggerated text just in
the bottom right there. So that is a very quick
overview of all of the tools in which we've covered in the previous lectures relating to TD engineering drawings. I hope that's all
clear. And once again, any questions, please
do send them to me. But aside from that, I will
see you in the next lecture.
58. Customizing the Title Block: In this lecture, we will take
a look at how to build and design your own title block for two D engineering drawings. So this lecture I actually
created around two years ago. It was for a group of students. They were studying
automotive engineering for a university in the States. I had a lot of good feedback, and it's still very
much applicable. And so feel free to design the title block as
per your needs, if it's to impress a client or for your boss or your lectra
if you're at university. Once you finish, do remember to select File and then save as, and then save as a template, save it in the
according location, and you can access
that for all of your future TD
engineering drawings. So let's begin.
The title blocks, there's only one available,
which is this one. And if we insert,
this is fairly bland. I don't particularly
like this one. So I'm going to delete that. And instead, I'm going to right click on the older itself. I'm going to select
define new title block. So this is where we will
design our own title block. So to do this, we use the
standard sketching tools, and we will draw
in the title block and add the appropriate text. So in this tutorial, I will be redrawing my title block that
I use in my lesson plans. Feel free to copy this, and you can add or
change it appropriately. So I will go ahead now and draw the frame for my title block. I will speed the
video up for this. So that is the complete
frame for our title block. I'll now go and input the appropriate text
boxes for this. So to do this, we'll
select text up here, and then we'll just click once roughly where we want
that text to go. And so in this case,
I'll input title. I'll put that in capitals, and here we can change the font. So here, I'm going to go
for size 2.5 and click. Okay. And then I'll just dimension that based on its
anchor point, which is here. I'll just go ahead and input
all the remaining textboxes, so I'll speed up
the video again. And There we have our text boxes in place. And now I'm going to go
ahead and input a logo. So to do this, I'll go to
insert and then image, and I'll select my logo.
That's looking good. Now, let's just check
what this looks like. So let's go up to Finish Sketch. I will save this title block as let's just say example block. I'll click Save.
And if we zoom out, double click the
middle mouse button, if we go over to our
drawing resources folder, we can see that under
the title blocks, we have our new example block. So if we want to
insert this, let's right click and select Insert, and inventor will automatically position it in the
correct place, which is in the bottom
right hand corner, in this case, that's
looking good. Just a few more things to add, such as the projection mode. So for me, this will be
third angle projection. And then the units,
again, in my case, I work in millimeters,
so I will go ahead and input them now
using these sketch tools. Okay, that is looking good. Before we do any
more work on this, let's save it as a template. So let's go to file and hover
the mouse over Save As, and then we'll select Save copy as template. We'll select that. And our inventor will open up the location for our template. So let's call this
example, TD template. And let's click Save. And now, if we go back
to our home screen, so I'm going to
select the home icon down here and then
we'll go to New again. We can see here we
have our example Tod template ready to go
and we'll select Create. And here, this is our template. And next, we need to
add the smart text to identify the properties
that are currently missing. So to do this, let's go over to our drawing resources folder, and we can go under Title blocks under our example title block. We can right click
and select Edit. And here, let's put in the
Smart text for the title. So we'll select
text. We'll click roughly where we
want that to go. And to Smart text, we use these three boxes here. So we identify the type, the source and the property, and then we click Add. So for the title, this would
come under the standard I properties in relation to the primary or the
attached model. The property here would,
of course, be the title. If we scroll down, we
can see that there. Click Add, change
the sides to three. And as you can see
here, we have title, which is in parentheses, which indicates that
this is smart text. Let me finish the
sketch there and press. And you'll see this is empty, and that is because we
do not have a model. Let's put in a basic model, so I'll put in this steel plate. That's okay. I
just tidy that up. If we look now at
our title block, we can see that
the Smart tech has recognized this part as
being stainless steel plate. So if we go into that part, we then go to file
and I properties, we go to the summary. You can see the title is stainless steel plate.
Let me change that. I'll put with say, jacking hole. Press Okay, just click Save then we go back onto the drawing
and we can see that Smart text has picked that
up. That's excellent. Let's do the same for material. So again, we'll right click on the title block and
edit, enter in the text. So for material, again, standardized properties
of the attached model, and we'll select material, d, change the size. Finish. Yes, and we can see here it's identified the
part, it's mild steel. Let's say that we
want to change that. So let's go to our material, and we'll go to, let's say, stainless steel, S
if we scroll down, we can see yet, the Smartex
has picked that up. That's great. Now let's do
the drawn by and approved by. So again, we'll right click
and select Edit. Add in text. Let's do the drawn by first. So this would come
under the standard properties of the
current drawing. So this is the engineer
or the designer, rather, who is
creating this drawing. Add that person in
and enter three, and we'll do the same
for the approved by. So again, it'll be under
the current model, and the property here would
be the engineer approved by. At that in, change that
to three. Press Okay. We'll finish this sketch there. Click, Yes, you can
see, it's drawn by. That's me. That's Chris and
approved by. That's Dylan. If we want to change these, we can go to Flee properties. And under project, we can identify the designer
here. So let's change. Let's just write my short
name so that's Chris. And then for status under the engineering approved
by, we can just put Dylan. It's okay. And so, yeah, we can see that the Smart tech has picked up these changes. Under scale, we can do that by right clicking and going edit
and adding in text here. The scale would be in relation
to the sheet properties. Again, the current drawing would be the initial view scale. So we'll add that in.
Just finish sketch there. Press, yes, and we can see that the drawing sorry the model being displayed now is
a scale of one to one. Let's change that to,
let's say, one to two. If you go down now, the Smart text has it
get picked that up. And last but not least,
we have the sheet. So we'll right click
on our title block and edit, add in the text here. And so if a sheet, I will do the sheet number over the
total number of sheets. So I'll show you how to do that. That's, of course,
in relation to the sheet properties under
the current drawing. This will be the sheet
number. Add that in. We'll then add a space
and a forward slash, and then we'll go to
the drawing properties and add in the total
number of sheets. Just change that to
size three and press Okay. Roughly position that. Just finish sketch. But yes. We can see here that this
is sheet number one of two. And if we go over to
our model browser here, we can see there are two sheets that are currently on sheet one. And so that is how to add the smart text to the
properties that are shown here. If you have any questions, please ask them in
comments section, and I'll reply as soon as I can. But aside from that, I will see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
59. Section Introduction - Additional Useful Content: This section includes a
series of practice exercises that utilize the various tools covered in previous lectures. These exercises were
created for students in the USA to practice and
prepare for CAD exams. They received a lot
of positive feedback and are intended to be
beneficial to you as well. Each example is
explained step by step, detailing the tools
and techniques used to generate these sketches,
models, and assemblies.
60. Coil Command - Modelling Springs: In this tutorial, we
will learn how to draw a conventional spring
using the coil command. So I have opened
up a new part and I will start a two D sketch. We can select any plane here. In this demonstration, I
will choose the XY plane. And first, we'll
start by drawing a vertical line
about the origin. We can draw this at any height. So I'm going to input
10 millimeters. And this line just represents
the axis of the spring. We'll then draw a circle to
the right of the origin. This will be 15 millimeters. I'm going to put a horizontal
constraint between the center point of the circle
and the origin, like so, and then going to dimension
between the origin and the center point at a
distance of 50 millimeters. We'll then go on to
the three D model tap and we'll select
the coil command. And here we have our dialog box. So our profile has
already been selected, which is the circle
here, that's correct. And for the axis,
we'll then select our ten millimeter
vertical line here, we can see a preview of
how the spring will be. Under behavior, we can select the variables we wish to input. So, for example, the
pitch and revolution, revolution and height or
the pitch and height. For this demonstration, we'll select the revolution
and height. So in the revolutions,
we'll input six revolutions and for height, we'll input 200 millimeters. We then have the option to
add a taper if we want. So, for example, if
I enter 15 here, we can see a 15 degree taper, like so, but a conventional
spring will not have a taper. And the rotation, sorry, we can add either a left
hand or right hand rotation. Let's stay with the
left hand rotation. If we click Okay, you can then see our conventional
spring like so. If we look at that
from the right view, we can see that the top and the bottom of the spring
do not have flats, so this is not
common in a spring. So to enter these, we can right click on the coil
feature and select Edit feature and add in a close start and
also a close end. We can input the variables here, flat angle and transition angle. So I'll input both
135 degrees for the flat angles and 50 degrees
for the transition angles, and we'll select ok.
And here we can see flats on both the top and
the bottom of the spring, which is more representative
how the spring will come into contact with the
top and bottom plates. That concludes how we draw a conventional spring
using the coil command. I'll see you in
the next tutorial.
61. Loft Command - Loft Modelling: In this tutorial, we will draw a basic part using
the loft feature. So we will start by drawing
in a number of planes, and then we will draw a sketch
on each of those planes, and then we will loft
between those sketches. So let's select the plane. In this case, let's select
Let's do the XY plane. I'm just going to turn
on the visibility, so right click visibility. Then let's go a three D
model, and we've got a plane, and we'll offset a new
plane from the XY plane. Let's do a distance here of
25 mil zoom out a little bit, and let's do exactly the
same from this plane. 25 mil, and then
just one more time from our new plane here. It's 25 mil. Let's
input our last plane. So we offset from plane, and we'll choose
the original here, so this is the default XY plane. And here we'll select -200
millimeters and press Enter. So here we have the
five planes that we'll use for our part
in this tutorial. Let's start on the
default plane. Let's start a two d sketch. And here we use the two point center rectangle
from the origin, and we'll input a square here, which will be 60 millimeters to press tab and
then enter 60 again. So there we have
our first sketch. Let's finish that sketch. Then let's select this
offset plane here, create a two D sketch. And here we will input a
circle again from the origin, we'll put in here 50 millimeters in diameter, finish that sketch. Then we'll start a new
sketch on this plane, which will be again a circle, but in this case, it
will be 85 millimeters. Finish that sketch,
and then we'll just input the
final sketch here, which will be an offset of sorry projection
of this circle here. So another 85 mill circle
you could draw instead. So we will begin to loft between these four
sketches here. I'm just going to turn off the visibility of each
of these planes. Okay, so we've got
a three D model, and we'll select
the loft command. And here we will select our sketches that we
want to loft between, so we'll select all
of our sketches here. Then we'll select okay. As you can see here, we have the sort of handle
element of our part. We just need to draw the final geometry on this plane here. So let's select this sketch. Start at two D sketch. I'm just going to rotate
the ViewCube, like so. And here we'll draw
in another two point center rectangle
from the origin, and we'll dimension
this as 150 at length. Breast tab, we'll enter in a height of 5
millimeters. Press enter. I'm just going to
rotate the model there, and then we want our
final loft to be between this sketch
and this face here. So we've got a three D model. Select the loft command. I'll
select this sketch here. Then over here, we'll just
select, this profile. Now we can see that's the correct loft that
we want. That's okay. I'm just going to
hide that plane. And then, yeah, there
we have our part that's been created using
the loft command. I'm just going to
touch this up a little bit with the Fillet tool. I'm going to drag cross
these edges here. I'm going to input
a five mil fillet. It's okay. Go to the home view. There we have our
completed part. If you have any questions
about the loft command, please post them in
any comments section. But otherwise, I will see you in the next tutorial. Thank you.
62. How to Split Bodies: In this tutorial, we will learn how to use the split command. This can be used to
either split faces or to split solid
bodies within a model. And so as we can see here,
I have drawn a basic part, I've drawn in a sketch
profile on this plate and here we will use that
as our split line. So let's go to three D model, and under the Modify
panel, we'll select split. We have a small
dialog box pop up. Now, first, we need
to input our tool. This can either be a plane
or a sketch profile. So I will select the sketch
profile that I drew in here. I'll select and then for faces, we need to select which
faces that we wish to split. And so to start with, I'm just going to select
these three faces here. I select Okay. And
as we can see, I've split these faces up, so I've got a total
of six faces now as they intersect with
our sketch profile. I'm going to delete that, and I'm going to re select
our sketch profile, but instead, I'm going
to select all faces. So every face that's intersected by our sketch profile
will be split. Like the exact same
principles as before. We have two faces based upon where
our sketch profile has intersected the model. I'm just going to show you
one last demonstration, which is by turning on
the solid selection. So first, let's select the tool. Let's use the same
sketch profile again. And under solid selection, inventor has already selected
this solid for us here, we know that because under
the solid bodies folder, there is only one
solid to choose from. We have some behavior
options here. So if we wish to discard one side or the
other, we can do so. But for this demonstration, I will keep both sides
and select Okay. And now, if we look at our solid bodies folder, once again, we can see there are
now two bodies we can choose to change
their visibility. And we can even apply
different properties to each of these solid bodies. For example, if I select solid
body 18 and solid body 19, we can see here
that I've applied two different appearances
to each of the bodies. But that's a summary
of the split command. If you have any
questions, please put them in the
comments section, but aside from that, I will see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
63. Condensed Summary of Inventor: Welcome to this beginner
friendly tutorial for Autodesk Inventor. This video will
guide you through the absolute basic tools
and features required to sketch three D model
and assembly parts in Autodesk Inventor. By the end of this video,
you'll know how to create simple three D
parts and assemble them. We will go step by step
and draw a basic bracket with some through holes and a Shamford corner,
as we can see here. Then we'll draw a standard
threaded hex key bolt. And finally, we'll create an
assembly file consisting of one bracket and two bolts like this. So let's get started. Let's open inventor
software first. Once us done loading, we
can see the home screen. In the center, we have
all of our recent files. They could be parts, assemblies, or drawings, et cetera. At the top, we have an
array of options for customizing and changing
various settings. And on the left,
we have options to open existing files
or create new ones, which is what we're going
to be focusing on today. Let's start by clicking on New here we are presented with
a selection of templates. At the top are the
part templates, then the assembly templates, drawing templates, and so on. It's important to choose the correct template as this
will define the file type, the units, and other attributes. We want to start
with a part file. Now, personally, most of my
work is in metric units, so I mean millimeters,
kilograms, et cetera. I will therefore choose a standard millimeter
part template. However, if you want to
draw in inches, imperial, then select the
English folder here and you'll be presented
with the imperial options. Once you've chosen your
template, click Create. Now we have opened a Part file. Let's take a quick
look at the interface. In the center, we have
the three D environment. This is where we will be
sketching and three D modeling and is the main
focus of part files. On the left, we have
our design tree. This is where all
of our sketches and features will be shown, and it enables us to edit these, which
we'll be seeing later. And at the top, we
have a series of tabs. The main two our sketch
and three D model. And each tab is a series of tools relating to the tab title. We'll be using the
core of these today to sketch and model
our components. On the right hand side, we have our viewing tools and
most importantly, the view cube, which we'll
be also using today. Let's start by
sketching and three D modeling the bracket
using these dimensions. First, we need to break
the component down into features and sketch and three
D model these individually. We'll start with the base,
then the vertical walls, then the extrusion holes. And finally, we'll add some
radii to the sharp edges, and we'll also change
the appearance and do a basic render. Now let's get started with
the base of this bracket. So if we come up
to three D model, we've got the option there. Start two D sketch.
Let's click that. And then you'll see
we have three planes. We have the XY plane, the Y Z plane, and the X Z plane. We need to choose one
of these to sketch on. So for the base, let's
go for the X Z plane. Let's click that. And then
we come back up to our tabs. Come under sketch,
and you'll see a whole series of
sketch tools here. We're going to start
with the basics, which is the rectangle tool. Now, we do have the option here for different types
of rectangle tools. We've got slots and
polygons as well. We're going to start
with the absolute basic, which is a two point rectangle. Now, let's come to the center where we have this yellow dot. Let's click on that
and bring this out and we can just click that so that we
have a rectangle. We're still in the
rectangle tool. So if we keep on clicking, we'll be creating
more rectangles. What you can do if you are in the rectangle tool is just
right click and select Okay, and there we have our rectangle. So to bring that to the center, we can double right click
on the middle mouse button, and we can zoom in and
out with a mouse wheel. So we want to dimension this. So let's come up to the again, under the sketch tab,
let's go to dimension. And let's select this line here. We'll click and then we'll see the dimension as per
the drawings 80 Mill. Okay, it's looking
good. Again, double click on the middle mouse
button, zoom out a bit. We're still under
the dimension tool. Let's click this line, put in the other dimension here, which again, is 80 Mill. And there we have
our basic square. Right click, press Okay. We want to put this
circle in the center. Alright, so we've got
the circle tool here. Again, under the drop down, we've got different tools, but we'll start with the
center point circle. So let's just click
anywhere inside the square, open that up, and
it's got a diameter of 30 millimeters plus enter. I want to get out of that tool, so right click, preso. But now this circle can move absolutely anywhere,
which we don't want. We want that to be
in a fixed position. So again, let's choose the
dimension tool up here. Click that circle. Let's
go for the top line. Let's put in the dimension, which in this case
is 40 millimeters. All right, let's do exactly
the same with this line here. Again, that's 40 millimeters, and now that's in the center. Right click. Okay. And we know now that our sketch
is fully constrained. The square can't move or
the circle can't move. Because if we look down here, we'll see it says
fully constrained. So everything's fixed, everything's
engineered well there. Now the next feature
we need to add is this Shafer in the corner. So to do this, there
are different ways. But for simplicity, we'll
just come to the line tool. We're going to select
the generic line, and we're going to snap
to this line here, and we're just going
to snap anywhere on this slin like
so, right click. Okay. Then we're going to
click the dimension tool, click the end of this line, and let's go for the corner down here and input this
dimension, which is 20 mil. We'll do the exact same
process over here. Input this dimension, 20 mil. And there we have the profile
that we need to extrude. So to do this,
let's go on finish. So we see finished
sketch. We'll click that. Okay. Again, double click on the middle mouse button,
zoom out a little bit. And then we'll come
over to three D model. I see, we have a load of
three D model tools here. Let's click on the most commonly used tool,
which is extrude. And we're going to extrude
the profile which we want. We're going to come back to
this toolbox in a second. If we move the mouse
over this profile, this is the profile
we want to extrude. Also got the option of this
profile and this one as well. We don't want to extrude
either of these. We only want this profile here, so we'll click now let's
look at this toolbox. So we've selected one
profile, which is correct. Okay? And under behavior, we've got different directions. The default, we can choose
the opposite direction, okay, like so, we can choose
a sorry symmetric, o? So that's extruding
in both directions, and then asymmetrical. So we can extrude so much in
one direction and the other. Let's just go with the default, right, then put our distance in. So as per the
drawing, this is ten. But you can change
that if you like. I'm going to go with ten. I'm going to click
Okay, and there we have the sort of generic
base feature there. I want to show you the view cube quickly, which is over here. And if we left click
and drag this, we can view it from all
sorts of different angles. Okay, we can also click
on the according faces or the arrows so we can see everything from
a different angle. Alright, so that's the
base feature done. Let's move on to the side walls. But for these side
walls, nice and easy. First of all, we need to define the plane in which these side
baalls will extrude from. In this case, it's
this plane here. So different ways of doing this, but what we can
do is left click. Got a series of options here to edit that feature, which
we don't want to do. We do want to create a sketch
on this plane, though. So let's create so let's
click Create sketch. Okay, I'll use the
middle mouse button, bring that back to center, and we'll see we're
looking directly at the face we want to draw on. Let's come up again
to the sketch tools, select the rectangle tool. I go to start from
this corner here, we're going to
bring this over and snap anywhere on this
line here, right click. Okay. Select
dimension, and let's dimension the distance
between these two lines. So that's the
thickness of the wall, which in this case,
is 10 millimeters. That's one wall,
right click. Okay. Again, let the rectangle tool start from this corner
and come up anywhere. Snap on this line here. Let's go dimension between
these two lines here, and it's the same thickness of ten mil. Okay, right click. Okay. Let's now extrude these. Three D model extrude. We need to select the
according profile. So we want this profile. We also want this one
and this one as well. Back to our box. So we've got our three profiles selected. It's the correct direction. We don't want to be extruding
in the other direction. We want to bring these
up by 40 millimeters, input 40, press Enter, and there we have
our side walls. We've got our side walls. We need to input a fillet
on this edge here. Now if we look around the
back on this edge here. Okay? So go back to the home
view under three D tool. So we've been using
the extrusion tool. This time we're going
to use the fillet tool. Let's select that. We've
got our toolbox pop up. Now we need to
select the edge that we want to fill it.
Let's select this one. Okay? And as for the drawing, it's a five mil fillet. Let's put five in plus
enter. It's looking nice. Got a fillet on the
back of 15 mil. So let's take the ViewCube, turn this around, choose
the Fillet tool again. Got our input 15 mil, select this edge there, preso. Just click on the home button, and there we have
our two fillets and our two sidewalls.
That's looking good. Now, let's go ahead and add the extrusion holes to
these two faces here. We're going to be
using quite a lot of tools that we've
learned already. But this time, instead of adding material, we're going
to be removing. So let's start by left clicking on the plane
we want to draw on, and we'll create a sketch,
bring that to the center. Go up to the sketch tab, kind of select a circle. We can draw that
anywhere on this face. We're going to diameter that 15 millimeters as
per the drawing. Right click, okay? I
want to dimension this, so I'll select the
circle and the top line. That's dimension that that's 20. Okay? And then exactly the same from this line
here, which is 35. Okay? Now, if we look here, we're fully constrained,
that's all good. Let's press finished
sketch. Okay? So we've got our geometry there and our profile
in the center. Let's go on three D model. And then we'll select
the extrude tool. But in the tools box here, we've got our profile
already selected. Great. But this time here, we want to flip the direction. Now, what you'll notice here, if I rotate the model, it's actually cutting material. We know that as well because
down here on the output, the output is to cut. So it's actually
removing material as opposed to joining
or adding material. So if you click Okay, we've now got our through hole there. Let's do exactly the
same on this face here. So we're left click,
create a sketch, then the center, circle,
15 mil, dimension, circle to line 20 circle
to this vertical line, 35, right click Okay, finish. G3d model, and we'll
extrude that again. And this time, yeah, we can either select change
the direction, so automatic cut or we
can just select cut. We recognize to remove
material there. Click Okay. Home screen, and there are
we have our two holes there. Now, in the final
stages of this part, let's go ahead and
add some radii to these sharp edges
that we see here. Let's also change the
material, the appearance, and we'll do a basic render.
Let's start with the radii. We'll go up to three D model
tool, and we'll select fill. Okay, now on this, I recommend putting in a one mill fillet, and we just want to
select certain edges. Now, there are different tools
that we can use to select. So we can select
individual ledges, or we can select loops. So a loop would be
like we see here. It's like looping
where that edge kind of leads to and
would radio all of that. For simplicity, I prefer just
to select individual edges. So I'll select this one here, this one, this one, these guys also do
the holes Okay, so we see a preview there. Those are all the edges
that I want to select, and we'll press Okay. All right. So we got rid of those sharp, inner edges. That looks good. Now, let's go ahead and
change the material. So for this, we go
up to the very top here and we've got our
material selection. So let's open this up.
I'm going to apply it, but it's up to you. You
can choose what you like. I'm going to apply
a stainless steel. We see a nice sort of
visual appearance there. In terms of color,
again, up to you. We'd go for sky blue, dark. It looks quite
nice. Then let's go into view, visual style. And let's do a very, very
basic rendering of this. So in the view tab up
here under visual style, we can select, like,
without edges, so we just see it shaded. Obviously, with the edges,
various other options here. We can see a wire frame
assembly and so forth. You can play around with
these. A basic render. Let's go to realistic. And then let's change
the lighting as well. So typically, we're
on default IBL. For this, I'm going
to choos Photo Booth. Then click on ray tracing. Then we'll see down here,
we've got different options. Depends on your
computer hardware. I recommend going for a
low quality ray tracing. Otherwise, it's quite
demanding on the hardware. As you can see, that's already complete, and we've got there. Yeah, quite a sophisticated
looking model. Okay? If you want to come
out of the rendering, again, we just click ray tracing there, then we're back to the
standard appearance. We can put some edges on that. Okay, so that's it
for the bracket. Now, let's move on to the bolt. So let's come to
the home screen. Now, the quick way to
do this is to come up to the top and just select home. Okay, now we're
going to go a new. We're going to come
under part again and select the same template. So in this case, standard
mill for me, click Create. Now we're in the part file. Now, the bolts quite
straightforward. I'm going to start
with the threaded parts the same process. Let's come under
three D model and go to start two D sketch. Got our planes
again. Let's choose the X Z plane once again. In this case, we'll
come up to sketch. We're going to start
with a circle, start right in the center that yellow dot, it's
called the origin. We're going to put the
diameter of the threaded part. So the shanks 15 mil. It's okay. Right,
click Okay, finish. In a three D model,
extrude that part. We're going to extrude that by the full length, which is 30. A double click
middle mouse button. Now I want to add that hamper to the bottom side here.
So this is a new tool. We've used fillet already. Now the tool next to it is
Shampa, so let's click that. Now, this shampa is two mill,
a two mill by two mill. So got two mill selected
already, which is great. I'm going to click
this edge here. It's apply to two
mill, like a pio. Now, if we look around there,
we can use the ViewCube. Yeah, that's looking
good. Now we want to create the head. So let's select this plane here. That's the plane we
want to draw on. We'll go and create sketch. Okay, use the circle tool again. Start from the
origin once again. The outer diameter is 25 mil. Plus okay. Right click. Okay, finished
sketch. Red model. Let's extrude not by that much. Let's extrude that by five mil in total
as per the drawing. Got a chamfer on there again, another two mill hamper. That's on this edge
here, plus a pi. Okay, that's looking good. Now we want to add a thread
to the threaded portion here. So right next to Chamfer, we've got the thread tool under three D model, so
we'll select thread. We got our toolbox here. So it was asking what face do we want to apply a thread to? This is the face
here. We click here. And then we need to
define the thread. So antimetric
typically isometric, the size or the diameter, so M 15, in this case, and the thread, the
thread as well, which is 1.5 mil. Direction, we can go left
or go right, behavior, we can do the full
length or we can add just a shank there
followed by the thread, so we can select 20 plus okay. And there we've got
our visual thread. Now, we just need to add
the hex key on the top, so right left click
there, create a sketch. Now, we've used the
rectangle tool before, and if we click
on the drop down, we've then got polygon option. You can choose the
number of sides. In this case, we're going
for a hex, so six sides. Select the origin once again. I'm just going to I
just draw it this big. There's no issues, press
done, apply dimension. So yeah the flat to the flat. And that is a total of ten mil. Press okay. Let's go finished
sketch looking good. Let's go three D model. We want to remove
material there, so we don't want to use
this type of extrude. We want to flip that, okay? And that's got a depth of
five mil, so it's okay. There we have our
hex key right there. Okay, let's go ahead and
apply material to this. I'm just gonna get four. I
just gonna stain the steel. Looking good. Okay,
let's save the part, and let's move on
to the assembly. So to create an assembly, we're still in a Part file. We need to exit this. We
need to go back to the home. So on the top left here,
we've got the home icon. Let's click that. And then
we'll go on New again. So we're going to open
up a new template. But this time, instead
of a part template, we're going to open up
an assembly template. So again, I'm coming
under metric, and I'm going to select the standard millimeters
template here. Okay, I'm going to see here it's an assembly uses millimeters. Click Create and now we're
in the assembly file, okay. So in terms of user face here, again, in the center, like the main focus, we've
got the three D environment. The left hand side, we don't
have a design tree as such. It's more of like a parts tree. So it lists all our parts, the relationships between them, any constraints that we give them, which
we'll be doing later. At the very top, we've
got a whole series of tabs and options
for us there. But again, today
we're just focusing on the absolute basics. So we want to place our
existing parts in here, which you've saved already. So we're going to come up
under the assembly tab. We're going to place, okay? And then just locate the
parts that you've made, okay? So I'll insert the bracket. Okay, now, if I zoom out, you'll see a bracket
will be inserted, and then I've got
the option to insert as many of these as I need, but we only need one
of them, of course, so rest control Z, if you accidentally
click anymore. So we put our bracket
in, fantastic. Now let's put our bolts in. So again, place, find the location of your
bolts. Okay. Click Okay. And then we want to have
two of these, right? Now, in terms of
inserting these, we have a few options
before we click. We can actually rotate these around the according axis, okay? So if we right click, we can actually
rotate around the Y, the X, or the Z. In this case, I want to
rotate around the X axis. Okay? So this bolts go
to sit somewhere here. I'm just going to throw it
over there for the time being. And then this one here, I'm going to rotate
around the Z, and that's going to
sit somewhere there. So I'm just going to
throw that in there. Once we're done, we
right click Okay, now you'll see that we
can move these two parts, but we cannot move the bracket. That's because it's the
first part that we entered, and so it's fixed in position. But we know that because
in the parts tree, where we see are three
parts here, okay? So in this case, the bracket, I've called part five, and then part six of the two bolts. Next to these, we can
see a black dot, okay? That means it's fixed,
and then a white dot. And that means that
it's not fixed, it's sort of fully constrained,
and it's still mobile. So what we need to do now is position these in
the recordings. So this one in this hole, this one in this one here, we want to have these, fully
constrained and fully fixed. So to do this, we use
what we call constrains. Okay? So if you
select constrain, we've then got a tool box
pop up where we need to select two faces and then
give those a relationship. The default relationship is met, which is the most common one we use. Let's go with that first. So the first selection, okay, is going to be the
axis of this bolt here. So we hover our mouse over, and we'll see that inventor recognizes that we want
to select the axis, which is correct. So
we'll click there. Alright. And then under
selection two, okay? We're then going to select
the axis of this hole here. Alright. We don't want to
select any of these faces. We just want the axis
there. Let's click there. All right let's click Okay,
let's have a look at this. So now you see that the
axis are constrained. They are concentric
with one another, but we've still got all this
movement, which we want to. We want to fix that permanently. So we rotate the model. So I do this on
the keyboard with shift and then
middle mouse button. You can use the ViewCube. Okay. So let's go on the constraint tool
again, rotate that model. And let's select the
flat of the bolt, and then select the
flat of this face here. Okay? And now we'll see that that bolt is sitting
comfortably in that hole. Alright, we can't move it in or out or up and down.
It's fixed in there. However, we can still rotate it, like as you're seeing here. So let's put a constraint on. Now this time it's not
a mate constraint. This time we're going to
input an angle constraint. So we select that and this here, there are
different solutions, so a direct angle, undirected,
explicit reference vector. In this case, most common, most basic is direct angle. Just going to select
any one of those flats, and then I'm going to
select this face here. See the angle is zero degrees, so that face is it's
parallel, essentially. But we could put an
angle there if you want, like 25 or let's go 45. Okay, we're going
to stick with zero. It's okay. That's looking good. And now, if we look
at our parts tree, we'll see that part six, which is the spot
here highlighted, I've got a black dot next to it. So it's now fixed. It's unable to move at all. Do the exact same process
for this bolt here. So again, constrain, select
the axis of the bolt, select the axis of the whole. Okay? Yeah, fantastic. All right. Let's move that out. Constrain, select
this face first, then the flat of the bolt. Okay. Okay, that's
nicely fixed there. I'm going to put the edges on, so view visual style with edges. You can see that a bit
more clearly there. Still rotating. Let's put
in the angular constraint. Let's go to assemble,
constrain, angle. Let's go direct, select
any flat, select the top. It's okay. On the home view. And now we see all three parts have a black dot next to them, and that is assembly complete. So from here, what we can do is a nice render if
you want to use this. I know in a presentation or you're doing any
marketing content, going to show it
off to your boss. Click the View Visual
style realistic. I like to use
photoboth personally. I think they give
nice lighting for rendering and I'm going
to go on tracing. Okay, just give that
a while to load. Again, I'm going with a
low quality ray trace. And that is our
rendering complete. That's looking pretty nice.
Yeah, good job, everybody. Just before we finish,
I want to quickly cover the parts tree and what we
can do in terms of editing. But if you come under
here under this folder, relationships, we open this up. We can actually see a list here of all of the constraints
that we've applied, and we can modify or edit these, can delete them, et cetera. So if you want to have a
play around with those, you can select the edit and
adjust them accordingly. Also the origin. So this
shows you the three planes. You can use these
in assembly files or in part files as well. So they'll show you the
three default planes and also the three axis and the center point or the
origin, as I call it. And then we've got the
individual parts here. So, yeah, you can right
click and delete these. You can also open them
up and you can see the constraints that have been applied specifically
to that part. So in terms of modification, we always come back
to the design tree, and it's exactly the
same in a part file. So I come back into
the file of the bolt. And we can see here that
we have yet the origin. So we're seeing the
three original planes and also the axis origin. We can then also see
all of the features. And if we open up each feature,
we can see the sketches. And we can modify any of this at any time by right
clicking to edit sketch, or if we do this on a feature,
we can edit the feature. Okay? We've also got
the end of parts. So, for example,
I can move this. We kind of go back in time, and so we can go to specific
parts in our model, and yeah, just take a look
at what we were doing there. If you have any questions about the topics we've covered today, please post them in
the comment section, and I will respond
as soon as possible. I hope you found this session
valuable and that it has enhanced your skill set
in Autodesk invento. This YouTube channel offers
many other tutorials, so please feel free to
explore those as well. And if you could
like and subscribe, it would greatly
support the channel, wish you all the best of
luck with your endeavors, and I'll see you
later. Thank you.
64. Condensed Summary of 2D Drawing Creation: In this tutorial, we
will learn how to create two D
engineering drawings. This is a preview of what
we'll be doing today. So here, I've got a three
page engineering drawing. The first page, as we
can see is the assembly. The second page is of
the individual part, in this case, the bracket, and a third page here is of the pin. So by the end of this tutorial, you will be able to create
and customize drawing sheets, add moral views and edits, switch between first and third angle projections,
edit decimals, precision and tolerances,
and modify styles, text, and add parts lists. Be doing this step by step
with this assembly here. If you would like to do it
with the same assembly, you can use these dimensions and model these two parts
up and assemble them. So to begin, let's come
up to the top left. Let's click on NU, then we
have our templates pop up. We don't want to
part or an assembly. Let's choos a drawing template. In this case, I'm
going to chose an ISO. You'll see here, we've
got options for dot DWG and also dot IDW, as well. I recommend going with DWG, as this is more cross
compatible with the other Autodesk
software such as AutoCAD and Fusion 360. If you do want to have your own customized template
like I've got here, I've got a separate
tutorial on that, you can have your
own title blocks, own borders, et cetera. Okay. But for now, I'm
going to go at so dot dwg. Click CRE and now we're
in the drawing file. So first of all, let's take a
look on the left hand side. We see here we've only
got one sheet in here. If we want to add more sheets, we can right click
and select new sheet. Okay, if we want to select sheet one again, we can
double click on that. Also, if we right click
and select Edit sheet, we can change the title here. I'm going to call that assembly. We can also change
the size as well, so I typically draw an A three. Over here, we've got
the orientation. So if you want to portray
or a landscape orientation, and then we can select
where the title block with all of our
relevant information will go, so I typically do the bottom right that's got a revision as well if you need to use that. So click. Okay, then sheet number two, I'm
going to do the same. I'm going to edit that. That's
going to be the bracket. Okay. It's going to be A three, as well, exactly the same. Then I'm going to
add one more sheet. I'm right click Edit
sheet. Call that. That's going to be
the locking pin. Okay. All right, so let's
come back to our assembly. Now, first of all, we have
the title block down here. This is the generic
title block that's supplied. I never use this. Again, if you want to
create your own custom, do watch the video on that
links in the description. But for the purposes
of this tutorial, I'll stick with the one here. If you do want to do
any quick edits to it, just come under drawing
resource under title blocks. Right click on the title
block and select Edit. And then we can edit
anything about this. So we've got the
smart text in here. We've al got all the
lines, all the borders, et cetera, okay? So we'll click finish. Once
you're done with that, I don't need to save
any edits there. So let's go ahead and add the assembly to our first sheet. So to do this, we come up to place Views, and
then we select base. Now, inventors automatically selected my assembly already. That's because I have it
open already in Inventor, but if your part is closed,
it won't appear here. In which case, click on
open an existing file, locate the file, select open,
and then it will appear. Got some styles that we can
have a play around with here, so we can do a shaded view. So this is already shaded here so we can see
the appearance, and turn that off for now. We've got the hidden
line removed or we can add the hidden
lines under scale, we can change that if we
want, so we got 1.0 plus o. And there we've got our view. If you want to add
a projected view, there are different
ways to do this, we can double click on the view, and then we can
project the side view or the top view using these arrows that we
see here or I can do an ISO view like so o. So you'll notice here that this is first angle projection. I just turn on shaded so you
can see a bit more clearly. This is third angle projection. But if you want to
work in first angle, it's an easy switch. So if we delete those
Okay, come up to manage, click on Styles Editor, come under the standard
under default standard, view preferences, and you can switch to first angle just here. I normally work in third angle, and I'll stick to that
for this tutorial, so save and close. Let's put that view
back in, so base. I want to have an IOview
on this page, right? I want to bump that
up a bit in size. Let's go for 1.5. I don't
want to have the front view, so I'm going to just
click Delete on that. Okay? So delete that view, place this roughly
in the center. I want to turn shading
on. It's looking nice. Now I want to identify
these individual parts. So to do this, I want
to have a Ps list. Let's come under annotate at the top and come
under parts list. And here we need to select either a document
or the view itself. So I'm going to
select the assembly. Okay, that's looking
good. Let's click Okay. Now we can just left click
and put that anywhere. Now, if we hold down
the left mouse button, we can then snap that
in any of the corners. I'm going to go
for the top left. A bit more information in
there, so it's double click, right click on one of the
columns on column chooser. I'm going to add in material. Solet material add, click Okay. Okay. Make that a
little bit bigger and move that re snap
that to the corner, like so so here we're
identifying the items, so it'll be balloon one and two, the quantity of those
within the assembly, the according part numbers, description of each
and then material. So we need to identify
item one and two. So to do this, let's
go to annotate, select balloon, and let's
click on the bracket here. Okay. Let's put in balloon one. Right click Continue. And then for the pin itself, let's click on that and then we're going
to put in pin two. We can adjust these.
So, for example, if I want to move this around, we can hold the end of the
arrow and reposition that. I do the same for the pin. Now, if we watch the arrow
head on the pin here, it will turn to a circle. Now, a circle will
only appear when it's in contact
with a face only, and an arrow will appear when
it's in contact to an edge. So it's just a way of better communicating what you
are trying to identify. Looking good. Let's add
a view to that, as well. So I'm going to come
down here and collect, toggle the visibility
and press Okay. All right, so it says, yeah, view ten and then
the scale there. All right. So I can change
that double clicking on this. I'm going to call that view
one, put a space there. So it's saying view
one is the scale 1.5 to one, in
terms of its size. Add a bit of information here. Again, I don't like
this title block. I always use my own custom one, do watch the tutorial in
the description for that. But for the purposes
of this tutorial, just go ahead and add in some of the smart
text information. We come under file,
come to I properties, and add in the company,
spot your name wrong. And like, Okay, there,
click Apply, okay. And now we can see the Smart tech has pulled in the company, who it was checked by, who it was approved by and the date. Then we've got today's date
and the sheet number as well. Again, any more
information on this, do check out the tutorial
in the description. Okay, so let's move on and
input the other two sheets. We've got the
bracket and the pin, double click on the bracket. Again, place views,
not projected. Let's click base. Now we need
to select the base part. So here I've called
it bracket one, two, three. Okay,
let's recognize that. When I put an aside view, a top view, and I go
for an IO as well. I drop those down
in scale a bit. They're a little too
big. Let's try 1.2. Yeah, that seems okay. Alright, with the EO view you always like to have that shaded. And for the purposes
of this drawing, we don't really
need hidden lines. We can see enough detail
there. That's okay. All right, that's
looking good. Let's go ahead and add some
dimensions then. So we come to annotate,
click the dimension tool. Alright? I'm going to dimension the total width of
this part, just 60. Now, immediately, we
can see there are two decimal places and
also using a comma, okay? So if we want to change that, again, we'll come on to
manage Styles Editor. Will come under dimension, open that up, come
under the default. So in this case, the ISO. Then we've got some units here. So I'm going to use a period
as the decimal marker. And in terms of precision, I'm just going to go
for one decimal place. All right, we can
do the same there if we're using angles as well. So saving clothes. Okay, so I got my period and
just one decimal place. Now I'm going to
go ahead and add in the remaining dimensions. Now here we want to identify the dimension of this
inner radius here. So I'm going to select that
radius and just come out. Inventor will automatically
recognize that and put an R in front of the
number, so it's radius. In this case, it's
a two mill radius. Press okay. Now I've got the
same radius on both sides. Not really that necessary, but just for clear
communication. I'm actually going to
enter by two indicates that both those radii R two
mill come on a dimension, I'm going to do exactly the
same for the outer radius. So in this case, it's four, double click on
that, but times two. Okay. And now I want to
put in this angle here. I want to put in a
tolerance on that as well. So dimension between these
290 degrees is looking good. I want to take off one
of these decimal points, so manage styles editor. Come on the dimensions again, and then one there. And I want to put a
dimension on this, so I'm going to double click and here I have a
lot of options. So I can come under
precision and tolerance. I can put in a symmetric
tolerance there. So yeah, plus or minus. And in terms of
degrees, let's just go for for one degree. That's okay. We can see we've added that
tolerance in there, and you can do the same with
linear dimensions as well. So if I double click this,
we can choose the types. I go for a deviation. So in terms of the overall
height of this thing, we can put that at zero. So that's the maximum it
can be a 60 millimeters, and that could drop down to. Let's put minus
let's go 1.4 mill. Okay? So that can then drop
down to 58.6 millimeters, but only has an upper
tolerance of 60. Okay, ain't going
to round off the dimensions for this final piece. Now, for the Shampa here, we could use the dimension
tool, but in this case, I'm going to recommend
using the ShampTol. This is just really useful. So we click the ShamfTol we
select the Shampa itself, and then we select
the reference edge. So in this case, I'll
select this vertical edge. And here we can see
that inventors then calculated as to
what that Shampa is. But in this case, it's a ten
mil Shamp by 45 degrees, so it's ten mil vertical and
ten mil horizontal. Okay. I'm going to also add
in center mark as well. I'm going to do that
on the through hole, so I click Center Mark just here and add that right there. And then if I delete
these two dimensions, we'll see a bit more clearly
the center mark right there. Another useful tool
is to add text, Okay. So anything we want particular to highlight or make a note of, we can select the text tool, which is under the Annotate
tab, click anywhere. Here, we can change the
font, the size as well. We can make it bold, et cetera. Then we can reposition that, so just hold it down, put
it in an appropriate place. Okay, that's looking good.
Now let's go ahead and add the final sheet,
which is the locking pin. We double click on
that. Put it in a base view, find
the locking pin, locate the file, click open, put it in an IA view and a
side view, change that scale. In this case, I'm going to
use two, position those. Okay, so that is a
very quick overview of the basics of putting
together a drawing. So we just have a quick recap. We've got the
assembly sheet here, identifying each other parts, and then we go into
those individual parts. So sheet two, we're
identifying the bracket, according dimensions, tolerances,
any notes we can make. And you can add to this with more information
that you need. And on the third sheet, I've got all the information
of the pin. Okay, I hope you find
that tutorial useful. And yeah, any questions, please put them in
the comment section and I'll reply as soon as I can. Aside from that, thank you
very much and have a nice day.
65. Section Introduction - Practice Exercises: This section includes a
series of practice exercises that utilize the various tools covered in previous lectures. These exercises were
created for students in the USA to practice and
prepare for CAD exams. They received a lot
of positive feedback and are intended to be
beneficial to you as well. Each example is
explained step by step, detailing the tools
and techniques used to generate these sketches,
models, and assemblies.
66. Sketching & Extrusion Modelling: In this tutorial, we will draw
this part in four stages. In the first stage,
we'll model the base, and in the second stage,
we'll model the back feature. The third stage will
be this feature, and the very last stage will
be this rib feature here. So let's go to start
a two D sketch, and we'll start this
on the base plane. That's the X z plane. I'm going to rotate the ViewCube
anticlockwise, like so. I'm going to use
the rectangle tool. We'll start from the origin, and we'll use the dynamic
input boxes to enter a length of 96 and
a width of 64. Like so. And then we'll
use the create line tool. We'll draw a straight line here. So this will be the
slot that's cut out. So that's 20
millimeters in length. Hold down the left mouse
button to draw in our arc, then close off that
sketch like so. I'm going to dimension
this arc here. So this is a radius of
16/2, so that's eight. Then we'll position
this according to this line here
directly in the center. So that would be this dimension divided by two, let's enter, there we have our slot in place, and this feature is now
ready to be extruded. So we'll go into three D
model, select extrude, select that profile there, and we'll extrude that by 16 millimeters according to the drawing. We'll press Okay. Go to the home view,
and there we have our base of the part here. Next, we have the back feature. We're going to draw
on this face here, create a new sketch. Draw a rectangle for this, start in this corner. Like so. I'm going to use the
colinear constraint. You position this line
collineally with this line here, and then go into
dimension between these two lines as
16 millimeters. And there we have fully
constrained that sketch. So again, we've got
a three D model, and we'll extrude that, and that is at a
height of 30 plus 34, that's 64 -16. That's 48. Press Enter. Then
we need to put in this Shapa feature
on this edge here. So to do this, we'll
select the Shafer tool. And here we'll
select two distances because as we can
see in the drawing, we have one distance
being 20 millimeters and the other being 30. We'll do distance one as 20, distance two as 30, and then we'll select
the edge just here. Yeah, we can see those are the correct dimensions
and press Okay. And there we have
the back feature. Now on to the third stage. So we'll draw this on this
face here. Go create sketch. And for this, we'll
use the line tool, start in the corner here, and we'll come up
at 26 millimeters, come across at 40
-24/2, that's eight. And then again, we'll hold down the left mouse button
and put in our arc. That can be any dimension
for the time being. Do the other eight
millimeter flat there, come down to this line, and then we'll just close
the sketch like so. Dimension this arc here, so that is a radius of 24/2,
that's 12 millimeters. And there we are fully
constrained that feature. So we go to extrude that. So like the profile
flip the direction, we'll extrude that at 64 -22. That's 42. Press Enter. We're going to the home view. Now we just have
the final feature, which is the rib feature. So again, we'll
rotate the model. We want to draw on
this face here. So left click the face,
select Create sketch. There are different
ways to draw ribs. Go to use the line
tool for this one. Come up the corner here, join to this corner, this corner. Then I'm going to right
click Select close. Now I fully defined
this profile here. So we're going to three D
model and extrude that. Again, we'll flip the direction, we'll extrude that
at a distance of 12 millimeters as in the
drawing. We'll press Okay. We'll go into the home view, and as we can see, we have now modeled this
part completely. If you have any
questions, please post them in the
comments section, and I will respond
as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
67. Sketching & Modelling Utilizing Fillets & Radii: In this tutorial, we will model this part in three stages. First, we'll start
with the base feature, then the more complex feature, and finally, we'll draw this
front feature just here. So first, let's start a two D sketch or
select the X z plane. I'm just going to
rotate the ViewCube anti clockwise 90 degrees. I'll start with the line
tool from the origin, we'll draw in the
width of this part, which we can tell
is 60 millimeters. Then we'll draw in the length
of the square section, which is 70 millimeters. And then we need to draw in
this arc of 60 millimeters. So hold down the
left mouse button. We'll draw in the arc like so, and then we'll finish
off this sketch, select ok. And here we are
fully constrained this sketch. We need to draw in
the through hole. So for this, we'll draw a circle on the concentric
with this arc here. So the diameter of this
is 16 millimeters. And then we can go ahead
to the three D mol tab and extrude this profile here by 10 millimeters.
That's correct. Then we just need to put in the cut out of the back section. So for this, we'll go
onto the front view, and we'll start a sketch
on this plane here. We'll draw in a rectangle
starting from this corner. So using the dynamic
input boxes, we have the dimensions
8 millimeters, and that would be ten minus six, so that's 4 millimeters. We'll go into three D model,
and we'll extrude that. Profile has already
been selected, and we'll select the
cut output here, and we'll select through all. So here we're cutting through all of the available geometry. And there we have
the base feature, so that is stage one complete onto the more complex feature. So for this, again, we'll go onto the front view, and we'll select
this plane here, create a two D sketch and
here we use the line tool, so we can start
anywhere on this line. That will come up by 13
plus 32, so that's 45. And then we have a arc feature. So again, I'm going to hold down the left mouse button and draw in my arc and just roughly finish that
summer over here. Right click, press Okay. And then I'm going to
dimension that arc. So that has a radius
of 20 millimeters. And then I'm going to
put in the through hole about the center
point of that arc, which is a diameter
of 18 millimeters. I think so. And
then I'm going to select the vertical
constraint tool. I'm going to select
the endpoint of this arc and the endpoint
of this line here. And then I'm going
to draw a line which joins those two together. And finally, I just need
to put a dimension in from this line here
and to this line, which is 20 plus 12
plus 32 millimeters. Then we have fully
constrained our sketch, so we can go to three D model, and we can extrude that
or select the profile, rotate the part like so. Then we extrude that. I'm going to select two. In this case. I'm going to select
this plane here. There we go, and
we'll select Okay. And now we just need to
cut out this section here. So for this, we'll draw
a sketch on this plane. Left click once, create sketch. I'm going to put
it in a rectangle here that we can put
it in any dimensions, and then we'll
dimension the width to be that will be 60
-7.5 times two, so that's 45 again. And then the distance from
the edge to the outer edge. So the wall thickness of this
loop is 7.5 millimeters. And then we'll
dimension the bottom of this rectangle
to the base here. That will be 13 plus ten. That's 23 millimeters.
And then finally, we just need to
dimension this line. It can be any dimension, providing that this top line
is above the top line here. And so we will extrude, select that profile, and again, we'll select the cut output. I'll select through. As you can see by the preview,
this is correct. We'll select okay.
And from here, we need to put the through
hole in on this surface. We'll select here,
create a new sketch. I'll select the circle tool. We'll input the circle here, which is 18
millimeters diameter. Then I'm going to dimension
that from this line here. So that's 30/2. It's 15. I'm going to dimension that from
this top line here, that is 45/2, 22.5. We're going to
three D model again extrude cut and again
through all. That's okay. There we have our
through hole there. We have one more through
hole, which is on this face, and so we'll select here.
Create sketch again. But in the circle, this time it's 10
millimeters diameter. I'm going to dimension
that from this edge here. That will be 30/2, that's 15. Then from this bottom edge here, we have a dimension of
15 millimeters as well. So again, we'll extrude,
cut through all. That's okay. There we
have our through hole. So just onto the last stage, which is the front feature,
which is just here. But this we'll draw
on this plane here, select the create sketch, and we'll draw in a rectangle, starting from this
bottom corner. We'll finish it over here. We'll select the collinear
tool, select this line. Make that collinear
with this edge here. Then we'll select
the dimension tool, and we'll dimension
from the top to the baseline at that's 13 millimeters according
to the drawing. And then we just need
to input the arc. So for this, I'm going
to use the circle tool instead of the arc in this case. I'm going to start the circle at the midpoint of
this line here. I'm going to draw it down until it's concentric this line here. I'm just going to make
sure that's concentric. There we go. I got a
three D model to extrude. We're gonna select the
according profiles. So the profiles we want to
extrude are these two here, and the distance
is 12 millimeters. That's Okay. And there we
have our completed part. If you have any
questions, please post them any comments section, and I will reply to
them as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
68. Extrusion Techniques for Removing Material: In this tutorial, we will draw
this part in three stages. The first stage
will be the center and the front extrusions. The second stage will
be the rear features, and finally, we'll input the through holds and
the rib feature. So let's start a new two D part. We'll go to start TD sketch. I'll select the base plane here, which is the X z plane. And first of all,
we're going to draw two circles at the origin. The very first one here
has a radius of 30 mill, that's 60 mill in diameter. Then the concentric circle to that has a diameter
of 40 millimeters. We can go ahead and extrude
that profile there, that is at a height of 60 millimeters, yet,
which is correct. We're then going to
rotate that part. Going to draw a sketch
on this plane here. So here we'll draw
another two circles, and this will be the
through hole here, which is 20 mill diameter, then we'll draw another circle which will have
the arc in place, which is 23 mill radius. So that's 46 mill in diameter. Just use the horizontal
constraint to make sure that that center point
of those circles is horizontal with the center
point of these circles. And then I use the
dimension tool to dimension in between
these two circles. We know that is a dimension
of 75 millimeters. And then we just need to
draw in two lines here. I draw in one line and the
one down here as well. I'm going to put equal
constraint between those two lines as they
are the same length, and then we're going to put a tangent constraint in between this line
here, this circle. And because they are equal, the same will form on
the other side, and there we have a fully
constrained sketch. What we can do is just use the trim tool and trim away
this part of the circle here. And then we can
extrude that profile. We want to extrude that in the opposite direction so we can select Drew that
by 15 millimeters. Like Okay, onto
the rear features. So stage one is complete
onto stage two. Stage two starts on a plane
that's 15 mil from the base, which is essentially
this plane here. So we'll select that plane,
select two D sketch. Just flip the ViewCube. We're looking at
this orientation. Then we'll go ahead and
model in a rectangle. We can put that anywhere
for the time being. We can dimension
the height of that, which is 60 millimeters. I'm going to use the
constraint tools here. So we're going to use the
coincident constraint between this corner point here. The center and the circumference
of this circle here, exactly the same
on the other side. And there these two lines
are then tangential to this arc because this
circle is 60 mil diameter. Well then dimension the
length of this arc here, which from the center
point to the back is 75 millimeters per center. And then we can go ahead
and extrude that profile. That's in the correct direction. And yeah, the correct distance
as well, 15 millimeters. We can then go ahead
and start a new to Di sketch on this face here. We'll draw in a rectangle. We'll start at this corner here. Going to use a
colinear constraint between this flat line
here and this flat line. Then we'll dimension between these two lines as
15 millimeters. Then we'll go ahead and put in one more rectangle like so. Just mention this. So
that is 10 millimeters. Going to put in a
coincident constraint between this endpoint
and this circle, exactly the same between this
endpoint and this circle, and then we know it's
positioned in the center. We can then go to three D
model and we can extrude those two profiles there, so
we'll select both of those. We'll extrude those at a
distance of that's 45 -15. So 30 millimeters let's enter. And there we go. That's
the rear feature. Now we'll start to put in the
through holes at the back. So for this, let's rotate
the model and we'll start the sketch
on this face here. The two circles,
drawing these anywhere. I'm going to put equal
constraint between the two. I'm going to dimension
one of them as a diameter of 16 millimeters and due to the equal constraint, they will now both
be 16 millimeters. We know that the
distance between the two center points
is 35 millimeters. Then we know they're
positioned in the center, so we can distance the center point of this
circle to this endpoint. That end line as that would
be a open brackets for this. There's 60 -35. That would be then half then we use the horizontal constraint between the two center points, ensure they're in the
correct position. Then finally, we'll
just dimension them from this top line here, which is 15 millimeters. There we are. They are
fully constrained. We can go ahead to three D
model and extrude those. We'll select both the profiles. Then we'll select
the cut option. And under distance,
we'll select two. Then if we rotate the model, we will extrude to
this face here. That's okay. There we have
our two through holes. Okay, onto the
very last feature, which is the rib, which is
just between these two parts. So for this, we'll go
to the model browser. We'll click the plus
icon next to the origin, and there we have the
three default planes. So we'll select
the XY plane here. We can right click and
select New Sketch. And here we will draw
our rib feature. So I'm just going to
draw that in roughly, explain why shortly. We'll
then dimension that. So the baseline here
is 25 millimeters, and the vertical line is
40 millimeters. Like so. And then I'm going to put it
in a coincident constraint between this endpoint
and this line here. Then we just need to
position this accordingly, so we need to move it
roughly over here. However, if we only touch this endpoint to the
circumference of this circle, the rib will not
be in full contact with the face of the circle. And so what we're
going to do here is we're going to draw in a new line we white
the way down, then we'll right
click on that line, add it as a construction line.
We're going to dimension. I just rotate the model here. I'm going to put a dimension between the endpoint
of this line and our newly found
construction line input then 0.5 millimeters. And then let's have a look
at that from the front face. So we can see here
that our line is now essentially in the circle
that we already have. Let's go ahead and extrude
select that profile. Under direction, we'll
select symmetric, and under the distance,
we can see here that the wall thickness
is 10 millimeters. Then we'll press Enter.
And as you can see here, because the sketch was
inside this geometry, we've now got this nice
arc going on here. If we go to the home view, you can see we have now
completed our part. If you have any questions
about this tutorial, please post them in
the comments section and I will answer
as soon as I can. Thank you very
much, and I'll see you in the next tutorial.
69. Multi Stage Modelling - Parts: In this tutorial, we will model this part in three stages. Stage one, we'll draw
the cylindrical feature at the bottom, and stage two, we'll draw the upper feature, and then stage three, we'll draw the join to finish it off. So let's start a two D sketch. And for this, we'll
start on the Y Z plane. We'll start with
those two circles at the bottom for the
cylindrical features, so like 60 mill diameter. Then there is an inner
one of 32 mill diameter. We can go to three
D model and we can extrude that, select
that profile. That's an extrusion of 50
millimeters, which is correct. For the second stage, we'll
do the upper feature. So for this, we'll draw
on this plane here, the left click once,
create a sketch, and then we'll start with the
through hole and the arc. So for this, the through hole
has a diameter of 20 mill, and the arc has a radius of 20, so that's a diameter of 40. Let me use the
vertical constraint, the center point of these
circles to the origin. I'm going to use
the dimension tool between the center point of the circles and to the
origin as 80 millimeters. Then we'll just finish this
off with the line tool, so we're drawing these two lines which connect these two circles. We use the tangent constraint. Make sure those lines are
tangential to both circles. Then we use the
coincident constraint, make sure there is
contact between the endpoint lines
and the circles. Then we're drawing
the flat across here. That is a dimension from
the center point of this circle to the line
of 40 millimeters. Now we have fully
constrained our sketch. We've got a three D
model and we'll extrude those profiles,
flip the direction. Again, the 50 millimeter
extrusion is correct. There we go. Now we need to extrude cut the section out here
of this feature. So for this, we'll go
into the plus next origin or select the correct plane, which is the XY plane, right click New sketch. Drawing this rectangle. And notice that I can't see the sketch behind this feature. So for this, we'll hit F
seven on the keyboard. We'll dimension
that accordingly. So from this line to
the edge is 50 -25. That'll be divided by
two, so that's 12.5. As for the width, we have 25. And from the line here
to the center point of these circles is 25 millimeters. So for this, I'm going to project the geometry
of the two circles. I'm going to draw in a
construction line from the center point of
those two circles. Going to select that line and
put in a lock constraint. Then dimension between the center point
of the circles and this line at 25 millimeters
according to the drawing. Then finally, we can put in
a dimension for the height, which can be, let's just say 60 millimeters, in this case, as long as it covers
all of the geometry we wish to cut the three
D model we'll extrude, select both profiles,
both directions. That's cuts through
all there we go. There we have the cut
out center section. And finally, we just need
to put in this join. So for this, we cannot use an existing plane as none of them are in
the correct location. So we'll go to three D model, go on the drop down and mid
plane between two planes, we'll select this
as our first plane. This is our second plane, and there we have a
plane for us to draw on. So let's left click once on
this plane. Create a sketch. Then we'll just draw from this endpoint here
to this circle, then exactly the same
on the other side. Let's use the tangent constraint again between the
lines and the circle. And now we are
fully constrained. Also going to
project the geometry of this circle and
this line here. Let's go on three D model
and extrude that profile. We want that in both directions. It has a total width
of 15 millimeters. Let's enter. I'm going to right click on
the working plane, turn the visibility off, go to the home view, and there we have our
completed part. If you have any questions, please post them in
the comments section and I'll reply as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
70. Modelling with Pitch Circle Diameter: In this tutorial, we will
model this part here. So I've started a new part. We'll go to start two D sketch, and we'll select the
base plane here, which is the X z plane. For this, we'll start with the bottom feature,
which is the flange. So we'll start at the origin. We'll draw that circle in at
100 millimeters diameter. We'll then draw the
through hole in. So again, start from the origin as a diameter of 30 millimeters. Then we need to place our
mounting holes around here. So these are placed on
a pitch circle diameter of 70 millimeters. I'm just going to right click on that and
slat construction. We'll use the circle tool, and we'll draw in the
first through hole, which is 12 millimeters. Then we'll just use the
vertical constraint between the center point of
this circle and the origin, and then it's fully defined. Then we can use the
circular pattern tool, select the according geometry. So that's this circle.
And then for the axis, we'll select the
center point here. Six instances is correct and
at a angle of 360 degrees, so we'll select okay, there we have our fully
defined sketch. So we can go to three D model, we can extrude this,
like the profile, and that's at a distance or 15 millimeters. That's
correct. Press Okay. Now we need to draw in
the cylindrical part. So for this, we'll select
this face, create sketch. Go to the circle tool,
start from the origin, and that has a diameter of
50 millimeters pre center. Then we just need to project this circle here to
maintain that through hole. Three D model extrude,
select that profile, and that's extruded
at a distance of 70 millimeters. Press okay. And then we just need to
draw in the final feature. So for this, we'll draw
on this plane here, a left click once,
create sketch. Then we'll start by drawing in the arc and through hole circle. So the through hole circle
is a ten mil diameter, and the arc has a radius of 13, that'd be 26 mil diameter. We'll draw the exact same
on the other side and use the equal constraint between the inner circles and
the outer circles. These circles have a
distance between one another at 100 millimeters, which is the diameter of
this outer circle here, so we can use the coincident
constraint between the center point of these
circles and this circle here. Then finally, we
just need to put in the horizontal
constraint between this circle and the origin and this circle and the origin. We'll then go ahead and project
these two circles here. So that's the 25 mil arc, you can see in the model, and also this through hole here. As I say, we need
to maintain that. Then we go on the line tool. Just drawing some rough lines
which we will go on to use the tangential
constraint afterwards to put them in the
correct position. So select the
tangential constraint and strain this line
to this circle, like so, and then to this
smaller circle as well. Just before we extrude that, I'm going to right click
on this circle, select it as a
construction line. Then we're going to three
D model and we'll extrude. This I'm going to
look at the top view. To select the according profile, so we need these two circles. These two parts, this part here. Home view. That's correct. And that's an extrusion
distance of 15 millimeters. That's okay. Look at
it from the home view. There we have our
completed model. If you have any
questions, please post them in the
comments section, and I will reply
as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
71. Tactical Sketch Modelling & Extrusions: In this tutorial, we will
model this part here. So let's start by starting a two D sketch on
the base plane. So that's the X z plane. Then we'll start with the
arcs at the rear side. We'll start on the origin, and that has a
radius of 25 mill, so diameter of 50. And then at the front, we have also arc with a radius of 25, so we're drawing a 50
milliameter circle. I'll use the horizontal
constraint between the two center points, make
sure they are aligned, and then our dimension between both circles at 60
millimeters, like so. Then we can use the line tool. And we'll join these
circles together by the top quadrants and also by
the base quadrants as well. Then use the
tangential constraint, make sure the lines are
positioned correctly. There we go. Fully
constrained sketch. And then we use
the trim tool for these two arcs here.
Take those out. Next feature, we'll
input the slot. So we'll take the center
to center slot tool, and that starts at the center point of this
circle or start there. It has a length
of 12 millimeter. Then it has a radius
of six millimeter, so we'll enter 12
mill there. Like so. And then we just
need to enter the through hole on the other side, which has a diameter
radius of ten mil, so diameter 20 mill. And that sketch is
now fully defined. We can extrude that profile, select that profile, and the distance is 12
millimeters. That's okay. And now we need to take out
the slot on the underside. So for this, let's choose
the appropriate plane. In this case, it's
the Y Z plane. So we'll right click there,
create a new sketch. And for this, we'll draw in a sort of two point
center rectangle. We'll start that at the origin. There's a total
height of six mill, this slot does, so we'll
then put 12 mill there. And then for the length
is 20 millimeters. We've drawn that in
place. We've got a three D model extrude, and that profile
has been selected. We'll select the Boolean cut, and we'll do that
in both directions, and we'll go through all. If we rotate the
part, we can see that's taking out the
correct geometry. We'll press Okay. There we go. That's our slot on
the underside done. And now we need to do the
extrusion about the slot here. So for this, we'll
draw on this plane, create a new sketch. I'm going to project the geometry about
this existing slot. I'm going to use the offset
tool and offset that. So the outer slot has
a 12 milliradius, so we need to offset
that by 6 millimeters. Then we can go on three D model and we can extrude
that profile there, and that is a height of 4
millimeters per center. There we have our slot
extrusion just here. Now the last feature
is on the rear side, so we'll draw this
on the same plane. We'll draw in a
circle radius 25 mill or 50 milldiameter circle. Now, through holes
already there, so let's project that geometry, then we can three D model
and extrude that profile. We'll extrude that by that's
20 millimeters. Center. Now we need to take out
the slot in the center. A number of ways to do this. Let's draw on this
face, reach sketch. And for this again, we'll do a center two point rectangle. Let's draw the total length
that's 70 millimeters. And for the width of the
slot, it's 12 millimeters. There we can go to three
D model and extrude, select that profile, select cut, and the distance there
is 6 millimeters. I say okay. And there we
have our completed model. If you have any
questions, please post them in the
comments section, and I will reply
as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
72. Sweep Modelling: In this tutorial, we will
model this flanged pipe bend. So let's start a two D sketch. We'll start on the XY plane. The first of all,
we'll sketch in the path to which we will sweep. So we'll start with a
line from the origin and draw that horizontally
at 150 millimeters. We'll then use the tangent arc, start that from the
endpoint of this line. We'll use the dynamic
input boxes here. So the sweep profile has a
radius of 260 millimeters, and it is a 90 degree bend. So enter 90. That's okay. Then we just finish off that
path with the line tool, the vertical line
at 150 millimeters. That's our path complete,
then finish the sketch. Now we just need to put in the profile which
we'll sweep across. So we'll go to the plus icon
next to the origin folder, and we'll select
the plane that's perpendicular to this sketch. We'll right click on the
YZ plane on new sketch, select the circle tool, start from the origin, and this will be the outer
diameter of the pipe. So we can see that's
290 millimeters. And then we'll just
finish the sketch there. We'll go to three D model. We'll select our sweep command. Profile has correctly
been selected. And then we need to
select our path, which is the path we drew here. And the preview here is
correct. Press Okay. And then we'll choose
the shell command, we'll select the
faces to remove. Then we'll select
the wall thickness, which is 290 -210, which is 80, and then
we'll divide that by two. But that's 40 millimeters.
We'll press Okay. We have here our
completed pipe section. We just need to add
in the flanges. So add in the flange here first. I'll select this
face create sketch. And for this, we can use the two point center rectangle
from the origin. This has dimensions of 360
length by 360 height, enter. Then we just project
the inner diameter there with which we will three D model and
extrude that profile. But this has a thickness
of 50 millimeters, that's in the opposing
direction, so we'll flip that. We'll just make sure that the
output boolean is joined, so we're adding material here. It's okay. It's our
first flange face. We do exactly the same on the
other side, create sketch. For this, we'll project
this inner circle to use its center point Use the two point center rectangle
tool again, 360 by 360. Then three D model extrude that profile, flip
the direction. Want to add material, select o. Got our two flanges now, we just need to input
the mounting holes. So let's start on this
face here, create sketch. And we can see that the mounting
holes are 260 millimeter spaced and 50 millimeters
dimensioned from the edges. So here we can use, again, the two point center
rectangle from the origin, and this has 260 by 260. And then we know
that each of these corners is one of the holes. So we'll just draw in
one of the circles, draw on this corner here. But this is the larger circle, which has a diameter
of 60 millimeters. And then we can use
the circular patental for this circle or select the axis to be the origin and the number of instances
to be four press Okay. We'll then select
the square lines, right click Add them
as construction lines, and then we can go
ahead three D model and extrude the
four circles there. So we want to subtract material, and the depth of this
60 millimeter hole is 10 millimeters. Okay? And then we just need
to do the through holes. That will be on this face
here and create a sketch. I'm going to project
the inner diameter of the circle so we can later
use the center point there. Or use the circle tool. We'll make that concentric
with this hole here. That's a diameter
of 30 millimeters. Then we'll go ahead and
circular pattern this hole around the center point of this circle with four instances. I'll press Okay. Then we're
going to three D model, and we will extrude or
select those four circles. Then we just go extrude cut, and we'll select to
rotate the model, and we'll cut to this face here, like so. We'll select kay. Then we have four mounting
holes on this flange. Then we do exactly
the same process on the flange at the
top, create sketch. Go to project this circle here. G to draw in the two point
center rectangle 260 by 260. D in one circle on the corner, 60 millimeter diameter,
a circular pattern, that geometry, about the
center point, four instances, press o. I'll make that
square construction. We model extrude. I just select those
individually, so one, two, three, and four, we will extrude
cut by 10 millimeters. That's correct. Then we'll just draw in the through holes. Again, I'm going to
project that geometry. Use a circle tool, concentric with the
existing circle, 30 millimeters, circular
pattern, select that profile, select the center point of the
larger circle as the axis, and four instances,
press oa3d model, select those four circles. We'll subtract material,
and we'll go to, and we'll select
this underface here. Okay. There we have
our flanges complete. Next thing to do is to add in the Shampa of the inner
diameter of the pipe. So we select edge,
this edge here. That has a Shampa 10
millimeters press. Okay. And the very
last feature will be the fillets on the
edges of the flanges. So we'll select each
of those edges. Then we'll input the radius
of 20 millimeters, okay? And there we have
our completed model. If you have any
questions about this, please post in the
comment section, and I will reply
as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
73. Visual Thread Modelling: In this tutorial, we'll
model an M 12 hex head bolt. So to do this, let's
start a two D sketch. We'll start this
on the Y Z plane. We'll start by
going into our drop down and we'll select
the polygon tool. Start this at the origin, and we'll draw in a
six sided polygon. We'll click Done. And then
we'll dimension the WAF. That's the width across
flats as 18 millimeters. I'm just going to
put in a constraint between the top point
and the origin, and then it's fully defined. Let's go to three D
model and extrude that. We'll select that profile. We'll extrude that head
by 7.5 millimeters. Okay. And then we'll put in the rounds on
each of the edges. So to do this, let's
start on this plane, start a new two D sketch. We'll draw in a circle
starting at the origin, and then we'll put in
a tangent constraint between the circle and
any one of the flats. That should be fully
constrained as so. And then we'll go
to three D model, and we'll select Extrude. We'll select that profile. And in this case,
we will intersect with the existing hexagon. But we'll put in a
taper of 45 degrees. And so anything
that this extrusion will intersect, we will keep. So essentially, this is a
technique in which we can add in the rounds on each
of the corner points. Select the okay, and
there you can see, we have those faces here. Okay, onto the other side, so we'll create the shaft and add the thread on this face. To do this, we'll sketch a
circle again at the origin, and this is an M 12 bolt, so that's a 12 mill
diameter circle. We got a three D model. We'll extrude that. It's
M 12 by 40 mil length. So we'll add put
zero on the taper, and we'll add 40 mil to
the length of the stud. And then we will use the
fillletTol on this edge here. We'll put in a one mil fill and then we just need to put in the champa on this edge here. So this is 12 -10/2, so that's a one mil champs Okay. And last of all, we just need
to input the thread here. So we've got a three D model. We'll select the thread command, have our dialog box pop up here. So let's select the face,
which is this one here. Then let's select
the type of thread. So typically, I would
use an isometric. I'll select that one,
and it's an M 12 thread. And here we can
choose the pitch. So I'm going to choose a 1.5 mil pitch, and then
we'll select Okay. And that concludes
I the model our M 12 by 40 fully threaded bolt. If you have any
questions, please post them in the
comment section, and I will reply
as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
74. Revolve Modelling: In this tutorial, we will
draw this part here. So this is somewhat similar
to a piston head and can be modeled using a
single sketch profile and the revolve feature. So let's start a two D sketch. We'll start that
on the XY plane. We'll start at the origin,
drawing a vertical line, which will be the radius of the inner arc there,
just 13 millimeters. Then come across for our taper. Then we'll dimension between
the endpoint and the origin, the width of the part,
which is 50 millimeters. Then again, we'll dimension from the origin to the
endpoint of that line. It's radius, which
is 19 millimeters. Back to the line to the
end point of this line, we'll go vertical here,
that's 80 millimeters. Then we need to put
in our two grooves. So here we'll come
across eight mill. We'll drop down by six. Then the width of our
groove is 12 mill. Come back to the top six mill. The distance between the two
is 50 -24 -16, that's ten. I'll come down
with the six mill. The width of our second groove, 12 mill, back to the
top will be six mill. Then finally, we can finish off the profiles there with
eight mil dimension. We'll put in the
vertical line here. Now just put in a
vertical constraint on these two lines here which
are not fully defined. Now they are fully defined to a dimension between the endpoint of this line and the origin, that will be the radius there, which is 79 millimeters. Back to the line tool.
Come across horizontal, we don't know the
length of this, but we'll put in
the lines like so. Then we can use the
dimension between this flat and this one here
as 20 millimeters. Then we just need to put
in another taper here, which will be parallel. So we'll select the parallel constraint with this slide here. So we'll select both
of those lines. They are now parallel. And we'll also put in
the vertical constraint between the origin and the
endpoint of this line here. So then we just need to dimension the radius
of this arc here, which is 33 millimeters. Then we can use the line tool to finish off our sketch profile. Finally, we'll put
in another line starting at the origin,
going horizontal. Put that as a construction line. Then we'll go to a three
D model and we'll revolve this profile about our
axis of revolution here. So let's select revolve. Inventor has correctly
selected this profile here. We'll then select the axis
this construction line. Then we can see the preview
of the part is correct. Need to change the angle
here to 270 degrees, and we'll flip the direction. Like so. We'll click. Okay. There we have
the completed part. If you have any
questions, please post them in the
comments section, and I'll reply as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
75. Advanced Sketch & Modelling: In this tutorial, we will
model this part here. You'll see that I have not
used dimensions in this part, and that is because there
are just too many dimensions to input into a single
schematic, such as above. And so for the dimensions, feel free to either pause or play the video
in slow motion, then you'll see the dimensions as I put them in
throughout the model. So having a look at this
model, it's slightly complex. We have a number of sort
of mating components and quite an awkward
flange geometry there. So let's begin by drawing that. Let's go on TD sketch.
Start a TD sketch. We'll start this on the z plane. And we'll start with the
larger of the two circles, which has a rat of 52.5. We'll multiply that by
two to give the diameter. And then we'll input the PCD, so that's a pitch circle
diameter that lies on a 90 1 millimeter that's a 91
diameter millimeter circle. Put that as a construction line. And then we just input some
of our through holes here. So on the top
quadrant of the PCD, we have eight millimeter
diameter circles. So I just use a
vertical constraint between the center
point and the origin. That's now fully constrained. Then we'll circular pattern, this eight milldiameter
hole about the origin, when we use eight
instances which are equa spaced across 360
degrees of revolution. Okay, there we have
our mounting holes. We're also drawing the
through hole here. So this has a Oh, sorry, this will be the inner
diameter of the pipe, which in this case,
is 30 millimeters. And now that's
fully constrained. So we can move on now to the smaller circle to
which we'll draw in. This has a rad of 40 mil, so that's a diameter of 80. It's also got a pitch
circle diameter of 66 mil. Just going to right
click and identify that PCD as a construction line. And now we need
to position this. So this circle here is
positioned 30 degrees. So to do this, let's draw in two lines
on a larger circle. One horizontal and one
at a angle like that. We'll then identify these
as construction lines, and we'll put in a 30 30
degree angle between the two. Then we'll just draw
in a construction line on this circle here. I'm going to put a
collinear constraint between this line
here and this line. And then we know
that this circle here is constraint to
this 30 degree angle. And then we'll put a dimension between the two center points, and that will be 91 millimeters. Okay, so our circles
are positioned. We're now putting through
holes on this PCD here. We'll start at the top quadrant, and again, that's 8 millimeters, and there are eight of them, then the vertical
constraint between the center point and the center point of
the larger circle. Circular pattern of this circle and for our axis, which
is the center point, eight instances, and again, aqua spaced across 360
degree revolution. Well, then choose a line tool. We'll just join up
these two circles. I use a tangent constraint to put this line in
the correct place. And then on the other side here, we have a that's an
eight millimeter radius. So for this, I'll draw
in a circle of 16 mill, and I'll put that
circle tangential to both the larger and the
smaller circles here. And then we'll use the
trim tool to tidy this up a bit because the sketch
is getting a bit messy. So we'll take out the
lines that we don't need. I want to take out
this line here. And they're going to take
out this 16 mildimension, which was the diameter, and we'll put in the
ad of eight mill. We'll also put in the
through hole of the pipe, which will spawn
from this area here. So again, that's
30 mill diameter. And now we are ready to
extrude our flange face. So we'll select that profile, and we'll extrude that by do
10 millimeters. Press okay. Okay, that's looking
good. And now we need to sweep for these two pipes. So for this, we can
use the XY plane, do a new sketch on here. I'll start the line
from the center point, this circle, which I'm going
to project the geometry of. Choose a center point
of this line, like so. Go back to the front view. I'll draw a vertical line, and then draw in an arc
come across like so. Use a tangent constraint between the arc and
this line here. We'll put in the radius
of this arc here, which is 40 millimeters. We'll put in the dimension from the endpoint here
to the base point. That is 60 millimeters. Then we'll finally just put in the dimension from the
endpoint of this line to the origin there at
143 millimeters. And that sketch is now
fully constrained, so we can finish that sketch. We can start a new sketch on this plane. We'll
draw on the circle. So this will be the outer
diameter of the pipe, which in this case,
is 40 millimeters. We've got a three D model, and we'll sweep,
select our profiles. Select both of these
profiles here. Select the path So yeah, looking at the preview,
that's correct. No press. Okay. And then next we'll
draw in the flange, which is just positioned here. So for this, we've
got a three D model. We'll offset a plane
this plane here. I'll be in the minus direction. I'd be -3 millimeters. Then select that plane. And we will create
a two D sketch. We'll use the two point center
rectangle for this tool. We'll start from
the center point, the dimensions of the
flange are 60 by 60. Then you need to put
it in our fillets. So the fillets are, sorry, the rads on the
corners a eight mill radius. I'll select each
of these corners, like so. Right click. Press Okay. I'm just
going to hide this plane. Now we start to drawing
the mounting hole. So let's draw in two of these. They're all 8 millimeters. Constrain them to
these lines here. Then we dimension between the
that's the wrong dimension. Dimension between the
two center points. As 44 millimeters, and then we'll put it in
a vertical constraint, again, between the
two center points, and now they're
fully constrained. We're just going to
mirror these across. We'll draw a vertical line down, put that as a construction line, and we'll go to mirror, select that two circles for the mirror line,
construction line apply. Now we have our circles. We
can go ahead and extrude that flange extrude that
in the opposite direction. And this has a depth
of 8 millimeters. Okay. Then we have our
flange face there. Just gonna put it in
the fillet detail on these two edges here. They'll both be 3 millimeters. Okay. And now we need to
draw in the other pipe, so we use the same method here, so that'll be the sweep command. So first of all, let's
start by drawing the path. This we'll need to
input a new plane. So we need to cross this with
a point that we'll input, which will be at the center
of this circle here. So we'll project that
geometry, put in a point. Just going to finish
the sketch here. Then going to input a new plane, be parallel to an
existing plane, and it will go through the
point which we just drew in. So we'll select
parallel to this plane, and we'll select
this point here, and as you can see, we now have a new plane in which
we can sketch on. We do two D sketch. Start
with the line tool. And before we do that, I'm going to hide
this sketch here. We no longer need that.G to
sketch 14, edit that sketch. I'm going to project the
geometry of this circle, so we have a flat line. Then from the center
point of this flat line, I'm going to draw vertically, like so, and I'm then
going to put in a arc. I'm going to make a
horizontal constraint between the endpoints
of this arc. I'm gonna put in a
vertical constraint on this line here as well. That's dimension this RD here. So this is 22.75 millimeters. Then we need to put in a
distance of this line here. So this 85 from the base. So I'll select the
top point in the base here at 85 millimeter. I'm going to hit F
seven on the keyboard, get a cross section view,
see what's going on here. I'm going to extend this
line down to the origin. So to do this, I'll
project this geometry. And then continue this line
to the origin like so. And that's our path complete. So we'll finish
the sketch there. I go to hide this
plane, so right click, press V. Let's draw our profile to which
we will use to sweep. So this will start
from the center point. So again, I'm just going
to project that geometry. This will be the outer diameter, so we're getting 40 millimeters. Got a three D model, and we'll
sweep those two profiles. I'll select the path
to be this path here. Yeah, that preview is correct. Press Okay. Looking good so far. Now, let's use the
shell command. There we go. Then we'll select the faces to
which we wish to remove. So we'll select this face, this face here, and this face. In the thickness, in this case, so the OD is 40 mil, the ID is 30 mill that's of both pipes and so the wall
thickness is 5 millimeters. Input fives okay. Then we can see we have our
holes here, which is correct. You can see also the hole that the join here
is correct also. Let's tidy this up
with some fillets. We don't like to have
these sharp edges. Put in some four mill fillets
on both of these edges. Also the external ones here. And also the joins about the
flange face like the ply. But one more fillet here, which I have a one mill
ad on this edge here. Okay. Now we have
our completed part. Just to check that it is
correct, let's go to view. Let's do a half section view, start at this pace here, and we'll just run
through the model and make sure everything is as it should be and particularly around the
join of the two pipes here, so that is correct, exactly what we want to see all smooth edges so that we're getting lamina
fluid flow, no turbulence. We'll just go back in
the opposite direction. A flange. And there we
have our completed part. If you have any
questions about this, please post them in
the comment section and I'll reply as soon as I can. I'll see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
76. Assembly Constraining & Movement: In this tutorial, we
will model a door hinge, and so we will draw the
metal fabricated part, and then the pin, and then we'll form an assembly of
these parts together. So let's start with the
metal fabricated part. Start a new tudi sketch, here we'll choose the X z plane, and we'll draw a two
point center rectangle, starting at the origin. So the length of this
will be 100 millimeters. Press tab. Then for the height, we'll input 40, okay. Let's put some fillets on
these two upper corners. So we'll select the
filllet command. We'll put it in a
five mil fillet, select these two lines
and then these two. Then we'll finish the sketch there, do them out a little bit. Go on three D model, and we'll extrude that
by 1.5 millimeters. Okay. Next, let's input
the mounting holes. We'll draw a sketch
on this face here. And for this, I'm going to draw in a construction line just to help me better
position these holes. I'm going to dimension
that construction line from the top line
at 15 millimeters. Just right click on that
that construction line. I select the circle tool, and we'll just roughly put
in the mounting holes. Use the horizontal constraint between the center points of the upper circles and the center points of the
lower circles, as well. Then we'll dimension one of
these circles to be six mill. We'll put in equal constraint
between this circle and all of the others so that they're all
six mill diameter. Let's then dimension this circle from this line as five mil, and from the side
there can be 12. The same for this upper circle. So from the center,
5 millimeters, then from the origin, we'll choose 12 millimeters. Same for this one here. So
from the origin, 12 mil. We've already got the five mil dimension there as they are constrained on the horizontal
between the center points. And for the last
circle, we just need to constrain it from this
line at 12 millimeters. Then we can go ahead
and three D model and we can extrude cut those
four profiles there. We select cut, we'll
select through all. Okay. There we have
our mounting holes. Let's just add a Shamp to the
top edges of these holes. We'll use the ShamfTol. We'll use 0.5 millimeters or select the top edges
of all four holes. Okay. There we go. We have our mounting
holes complete. Now for the next sketch, we'll select this plane here, create two D sketch. We'll input two circles. The first will be ten
mill in diameter. We draw a circle concentric
to that at six mill diameter. Let's then put in a
coincident constraint between the corner here and this outer circle so
that they are touching. And then we can
dimension between the center point of this
circle and this line here. We'll do that at
0.5 millimeters. And then we'll select
the line tool. We'll then put some
sketching here. So we'll start at this corner
point just to this circle. And again, we'll put
another line roughly there. One more down here. And then we use the
dimension constraint between these two lines. Let's put that as
1.5 millimeters. Then we can use the trim tool, trim away these two lines
and also this line here. Then we can use the Fillet tool. Let's put a one mil fillet
on this corner here. So this one here like soap, we'll finish the sketch there. Then on three D model,
we'll extrude that profile, flip the direction, and we'll input a length of
25 millimeters. Okay. Looking good. And then let's
repeat this feature. It's got a three D model, and we'll rectangular pattern, select that feature there. And for the direction,
we'll select this line, but we'll flip its direction instances of
two, that's correct. And then for the distance, we'll put 50 millimeters offset. Okay. I'm going to turn
off the edges for this. Okay, that's looking good. And next, we need
to draw the pin. So for this, let's do
this on the XY plane. We'll start with a circle from the origin to be ten
mill in diameter. Go on three D model, and let's extrude that by 2 millimeters. That's okay. Then we'll
select this face here, left click once,
create two D sketch. Again, we'll select the
circle tool from the origin. We'll position this
as 6 millimeters. Then three D model, extrude that by 100 millimeters. That's okay. I'm just going to put
an appearance on that. Let's go with a glossy black. Okay, and then we can save that part and we can
form our assembly. And here, I've opened
up a new assembly file, so let's go ahead
and place our parts. Select the sheet metal
component first. Then we'll just input
one more of these parts. We're back on place, and
we'll put in the pin as well. Looking good. Let's
go ahead and re rotate this part here so that it is in the correct
orientation. And I'm going to do exactly
the same for the pin as well. So free rotate. Rotate
that roughly 90 degrees. Then we're going constrain,
and we'll constrain the axis concentrically of this face
here and this face, apply. Then we'll just go ahead
and constrain this face here to this face here. Apply. And then
we'll do the pin. So yeah, again, we'll select the axis of the pin
and the axis here. Then we'll select the
face of the pin and this contact face
here. Apply, okay. There we have our
completed hinge. If you have any
questions about this, please post them in
the comments section, and I'll apply as soon as I can. But I will see you in the
next tutorial. Thank you.
77. Advances Modelling Example: In this tutorial, we will
model a caster wheel. So typically, we would draw
the parts individually and then constrain them
together in an assembly file. But for the purposes
of this tutorial, I'll just draw all the parts
into a single part file. So let's start with the
frame of the caster wheel. So we'll start a two D sketch, and we'll select the X z plane. Then we'll look at this
from the top view, and we'll use the circle
tool from the origin, and we're drawing a circle with a diameter of 50 millimeters. Then we'll go on three D model, and we'll extrude that
profile, rotate that. Extrude that again
by 50 millimeters. Let's put in a fillet of, let's do 5 millimeters
on this edge here. Okay. Looking good so far. Then
we want to offset a plane. So we'll offset plane, and we'll do this
from the Y Z plane. We'll offset that
by 32 millimeters. Look on that plane and
create a two D sketch. And here we'll draw a
two point rectangle. The height of this will be 45 millimeters and the width
will be 38 millimeters. Let's go ahead and
position that. So let's project this geometry, and then we can use the
collinear constraint between that projected line and the
top line of our rectangle. And then we can
use the dimension tool and dimension between the sideline here of our rectangle and the endpoint of this projected line here. And here the dimension
will be 6 millimeters. The cylindrical part
has a diameter of 50 mil -38 mil from that, which is length width of the rectangle, and
then we divide it by two. So 12 to by two, that's six. That's then fully constrained. We'll call on three D model. I extrude, select that profile. We'll flip the direction,
and we will extrude that too and we will
select this face here. And as of the preview, that's exactly what we're
after. I said, Okay. I just want to hide that plane, so we're going to
right click on it, and I'm going to hit V on the keyboard, which
is visibility. Take that out. Next, we want to cut away a
part of this profile. So let's start a two D sketch, and we'll do this
on the XY plane. That's correct. And I'm just going to hit F
seven on the keyboard. So yeah, we can look at
exactly what we're drawing on. We'll draw a line from this line here to the corner point
this corner point, then we'll close the
sketch or dimension between this corner point and this top line here
is 10 millimeters. Then we have a fully
constrained sketch. Three D model, and we'll extrude, we'll
select that profile. We want to extrude cut we want to extrude it cut
in both directions. We're going to hit symmetric. We're going to hit
through all. Then yeah, we're cutting away all
of this profile here. We'll press Okay,
as you can see all of that geometry there
has been cut away. That's great. Now we want to apply a draft
angle to this face here. If we're going three D model, we'll use the draft command. For the pull direction,
we'll select this face here, and for the faces to draft. This will be at a 20
degree draft angle, which is suitable for
what we're after. We'll select this face
here, and we'll press Okay. And then we'll tidy this up a bit using the fillet command. Let's put an eight mill fillet, which is quite sharp for this
edge here. That looks good. We'll add another fillet
or 5 millimeters. We'll select this
edge, this one, Arc, edge here, then this edge. Yeah, that's looking
good. Let okay? The next, we need to
use the shell command. So we'll select remove faces, and we'll select the
automatic face chain command. So make the workflow
a bit more efficient. We do a thickness of 2.5 mil. Then we'll select
this face here. Because we have automatic
face chain selected, it's gone and selected all three of these faces
here, which is correct. We want those to be removed. We'll hit Okay, looking nice. Let's do our through
hole on this face here, so this will be for the
pin and for the wheel. To do this, I'm going
to project this archea, and I'm going to use
the circle geometry on this center point here for a ten millimeter
diameter circle. I'm going to extrude cut. I'm going to select
through all Okay Okay, so that's the frame complete. We now need to put
in the caster wheel. So we will revolve this. So to do this, we need
to input a plane. And we'll do this parallel to an existing plane
and through a point. So we need to
identify that point. I'm going to turn on,
so I'm going to edit the sketch of these
through holes, and I'm going to input a point, the center of this circle. I'm going to finish
the sketch there. I'm going to turn
on that sketch, so I'm going to right
click and hit visibility, and now we can see
that point there. Let's go and input
our plane. We'll do parallel to plane through point, parallel to the W one is
it? It's the Y Z plane. And then the point. I'll
select this point here, as we can see that plane's
in the correct position. This is the plane in
which the axis and our cross sectional profile
of the wheel will lie on. I'd like to select that
plane two D sketch. I'm going to hit F seven
on the keyboard once again. There we go. Got to turn off that sketch
that we no longer need. I'm also going to hide the visibility for the
plane we're working on. We don't need to see
that. We're going to project these two arcs here. We're going to use
the center points of these lines to input
a center line. So this will be the
axis of revolution. I go to trim away
that line there. There we go. I want to put in a lock constraint on that line. I don't want that to move. And then we can begin to draw the cross sectional profile
of our caster wheel. So let's let the line tool
throw a straight line, roughly down here like soap. Then we'll put in
a three point arc starting at the end
point of that line. Again, just roughly over here. We'll use a radius or 40 mil then we'll draw a
straight line coming down, so we're drawing
that at ten mill, then we'll come across to
be on par with the origin. But that's looking good. Then we'll just draw a straight line coming all the way up. Finish off that profile. I got a dimension between this line here and this
line here at 1 millimeter. I'm going to put a fillet in of, let's say, 5 millimeters
on these two lines here. Okay. And then I want
to mirror this line, this arc, this line,
this arc, and this line. I'm going to mirror them around our center line
here. Press Okay. That's the cross sectional
profile of our wheel. So all we need to do
now is to revolve. Select those two profiles. And for the axis, this line
here, review looks good. Okay. There we have our wheel. That's looking nice. I'm just going to change the appearance
of some faces here. So I'm going to
hold down control, select these faces, change those appearances
to, let's say, red. Let's do our through
hole on the wheel now, so we'll select this
face two D sketch. Project this geometry here so we can use it center line.
I saw CenterPoint. Draw an eight mill circle
here on three D model. I extrude that profile. We want to extrude
cut. I want to go through going all the
way through the wheel. There we have our through
hole. Looking good. Now we need to input our pin. For this again, we'll
use the revolve command, and we'll do this on the plane, which we input earlier. We're doing a new sketch.
I'm going to hit F seven. Directly at the plane
we're drawing on, and I'm going to use the
same tactic as before. So I'm going to take these
two arcs, reject them. I'm going to draw a line between the center point of
both these arcs. W axis of revolution. I'm a offset that line, sorry, by 4 millimeters. They're going to put a lot
constraint center line there. Come over to one side,
zoom in a little, and let's use the line tool extend this line here
by 4 millimeters. Want to select this line
here, check that line. Use a three point arc, start at the end of this line, position it on the
projected line. We'll input a rad of seven mil. Okay, we can't input
a rod of seven mil. Let's try that again. 7
millimeters. That's good. Then let's use the
dimension tool between the endpoint of that
line and this line here. Do that 2 millimeters. There we have what would
be the dome of our pin. Let's put a mirror line in the center here and put that exact geometry
on the other side. Let's select the
line tool coming at the center point of this
line going this line. Now we'll use mirror mirror, this arc and this line. We'll mirror them about mirror
line here, press apply. That's looking good. That
is a construction line, and we'll project this line as well, like we did
on the other side. That completes the profile,
reading model revolve. Select this profile, center
profile, this profile here. For the axis, we'll
select our axis here. Okay. And there we have
our pin in the center. It's looking good. I'll
select those two domes. Again, I want to put on them a red appearance.
Write that again. Yeah, there we go. And the
last feature to add to this is the mounting
plate on this plane here. So let's create a two d sketch
this from the top plane, rotate that 180 degrees. And we use a two point
center rectangle, start at the origin there. The width will be 80 and
the height will be 60. Let's put in eight mile fillets
between these lines here. Then that's three D model
and extrude that profile. But let's only extrude that by let's say sheet metal, 2.5 mil. Good. There we'll input
our mounting holes. So these would typically
be slot on a caster wheel. For this, we'll use the center
to center slot command. For distance, we'll use 8 millimeters for the
diameter dimension, so enter ten dimension between the top
line and this line. A five mill dimension there. The center point of this
arc and this line here. Let's do let's say ten mil let's use a line command and
draw in mirror lines. So drawing a vertical line
and a horizontal line. Both those lines, put
them as constructions. Like the mirror tool
again, select our slot, mirror it about the vertical
mirror line. The two slots. I'll select those two slots, mirror those about
a horizontal line by four slots available.
Get a three D model. We'll extrude those four
slots. You want to cut them. And we can either extrude
them by 2.5 mil or I prefer to extrude two face like this face here. Press okay. There we have our four
slots in position there. And that is our
complete caster wheel. If you have any questions
about this part, please ask in the
comments section or apply as soon as I can. Aside from that, I'll see you in the next tutorial. Thank you.
78. Flange/ Mating Face Assemblies: In this tutorial, we will
model a basic flange coupling. Let's start a new part, and we'll select star two D sketch. We'll do this on the XY plane or start off by drawing
the flange itself. So let's do this
from the origin. Let's use an OD of 165 mil. Then we can draw in the PCD, that's a pitch circle diameter, which in this case, we'll
choose one, two, seven mil. On a right click on that PCD and identify it
as a construction line. Then we can go ahead and
input our mounting holes. So let's just throw in one here. So let's do a 16
mill mounting hole. Let's put a
coincident constraint between the center point
of that hole and the PCD, and then a vertical
constraint between, again, the center point of
that circle and the origin. So that's now fully constrained. We can go ahead and
circular pattern there. Let's select the hole as
the geometry to pattern. And for the axis, we'll
choose the origin. We want to have eight instances, and these will be across
the 360 degree revolution. Press Okay. Let's go ahead and three D
model extrude that. Select that profile. I will extrude that by as
18 millimeters. Okay, next, let's draw a
sketch on this face here. So left click ones,
create two D sketch. Select the circle tool again,
start from the origin. This has an 80 mil diameter. We'll go a three D model but extrude that profile by 100 mil. Okay. We can then go and
put in the wall thickness. So let's select this face,
create two D sketch. Again, we use the
circle command, and we'll draw in a circle here. Actually, no, let's reject
the existing geometry, then we can offset that
by the wall thickness. So in this case, 8 millimeters, got a three D model and
extrude this profile here, I would extrude cut.
We'll go through all. Okay. There we can see we
have our through hole. Let's put on some
fillets on this part. Let's go fill a two mill
fillet on this edge here, and then we'll add
a one mil fillet on this edge and this one here. Okay. That's looking good. Save that. And then we'll
move on to the assembly. And here, I've opened
up a new assembly file. Let's go to place, and let's
input our flange here. So I've called this part
flange tutorial. That's okay. But yeah, we'll
insert two of these, so we'll put one grounded. And then for the other
one, let's just rotate that so we can right click
and rotate about the Y axis. Let's do this twice so we
can rotate 180 degrees. Then we'll left
click once again, but roughly in position. I'm just going to go to view and put on shaded with edges. Then we can go and
assemble and use the constrain between the
center point of this flange. Sorry, the axis of
this flange and the axis of this
one, click apply, move that to the
correct position, and then we can
constrain any one of these mounting holes with its
opposite on the other side. So let's choose this
one, click Apply. And then just one more
constraint will be the mating constraint between this face here and
this face here. Okay. It's now
fully constrained. Next, we need to
insert the fasteners. So for this, instead of drawing the fasteners themselves
and inserting them, we can actually choose fasteners from the orthodex library. So under place, we'll go
place from content center. And here I'm just
going to turn on a filter, which is the ISO, so it's going to mark
out the IO parts, and we'll choose bolts. For this, we chose hexed bolts. And here we'll choose let's
go to Io 4014, presso. Left click once, and then we can define the bolt
we want to input. So we do 16 mill through holes, so let's choos an M 16 thread. For the nomal length, we'll
choose 65 mil. That's fine. Again, let's rotate this around
the Y axis by 90 degrees. Left click once. Then let's go ahead and constrain
that to position. So we'll select, first of all the axis of the bolt and the axis of
the through hole. Let's apply that and then
we'll mate this face here to the bolt face apply. Then one more constrain we'll add to prevent the bolt
head from rotating. So we will select the X z
plane and constrain that. We'll use the angle constrain, the directed angle this
face here, zero degrees. Press okay. Now that bolt
head can no longer rotate. And pattern that. So we'll select that bolt,
circular pattern. And for the axis, we'll
select this cylinder here. For the number of instances,
we'll select eight. And for the angle, so we want to have one bolt at every 45 degrees,
which is 360/8. It's okay. There are all
our bolts. That's great. We do exactly the same
for the nuts, as well. So place from content Center. Let's go nuts. We'll chose a hex
nut and IO 4032. Left click once,
and 16, press okay. Now, I'm just going to
click anywhere, Constrain. Let's choose the axis of that nut with the
axis of this bolt. And again, a mating
constraint between this face and the
face of the nut. It one more constrain
in between this face of the nut and this face
of the bolt head. I'll be an angle,
a directed angle. Okay. And exactly the same. So let's pattern that nut, for the axis, let's choose
the axis of this cylinder. Again, eight instances spread
across 45 degree intervals. There we have the
fastness complete. That is the end of the tutorial. If you have any
questions, please post them in the
comments section, but aside from that, I will
see you in the next tutorial. Thank you.
79. Engine Valve Modelling & Sketch Constraints: In this tutorial, we will
model a engine valve. And so to do this, we will
draw the profile of the valve, and then we will
revolve around that. But let's start a two D sketch, and we'll select the XY plane. We'll start at the
origin, and we'll draw in a straight line,
which will be vertical, so this will be our
line of revolution, and we'll put it in a height of 90 mill for this demonstration. Go to the top of that
line, and again, we'll select the line tool, and we'll come across
horizontally by the radius. So that'll be four mill then we'll come
down vertically at 2.5 mil and we'll come into the profile then at no 0.5 mil. And so from here, let's
select the three point arc. Although just before that, I'm going to move this
dimension out of the way. But yet, three point arc, we'll start at the
endpoint of this line, and we use the dynamic
input boxes to identify the other
endpoint of the arc. Over this, we'll enter
five mill and then press tap on the keyboard
and enter 90 degrees. And now we just need
to input the radius. So in this orientation, we'll put in a rad
of 5 millimeters. That's looking good.
Then let's just come out of the profile by that 0.5 milt. Then we can come
all the way down, just position the line
roughly down there, and we'll just apply
the vertical constraint to that line, make
sure it's vertical. Again, let's use the line tool, and we'll start from the
endpoint of this line. We'll come across
here by 28 mil, and then we will
come up by 1.5 mil. Going to move that
dimension out of the way. We just want to draw
in our line here, which will be at an
angle of 135 mil. Let's press tab and
enter 135, press Enter. And then we can use the
dimension tool between the endpoint of this line
here and the baseline. This will have a height
of 4 millimeters. And then all we need to do
now is to put in our arc. So to do this, let's
use the tangent arc. It'll be tangent from this
end point of this line. It will finish on
this line here. Let's put in a
dimension on that ad of 16 mil then we have
our profile complete. That's fully constrained. Let's go to three D model, and let's revolve that profile. And for the axis, we'll
select our 90 mil line. So this one here. Review
looks good. Press okay. And then we have
our engine valve. If you have any
questions, please post them in the
comments section, but aside from that, I will see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
80. Multi-plane Extrusions: In this tutorial, we will
model a generic camshaft. So let's start a two D sketch, and we're going to
sketch the profile of the lobe on the XY plane. We'll start by using the
circle tool from the origin, and we'll draw in a
circle of 35 millimeters. Just above that, let's
draw in another circle. That would be 8
millimeters in diameter, and let's use the
vertical constraint between the center
points of both circles, and then we use the
tangential constraint between both of these circles so that
they're in contact like so. Let's use the line tool now
and just draw a line anywhere between the two circles and just the same
on the other side. Again, we'll use the tangential constraint between this line, this circle and with the
smaller circle as well. Repeat the process
for this line. And then we have our
profile of the CaM lobe. Et's go to three D model, and we'll extrude all
of these profiles. Extrude them by 20 millimeters. Okay. That's our first lobe.
Let's draw the other one. So let's offset a plane, select this face here. We'll offset that plane by
80 millimeters. That's okay. Then select that plane, create two D sketch. We're going to project
the profile of the lobe which we drew
before, like soap. I'm just going to hit F
eight on the keyboard, and I'm going to delete these
projection constraints, and that gives us freedom
over this profile, and then we can rotate that. Let's use the rotate tool, and we'll draw a box
around our sketch. And for the center
point, use the center, and let's input 180
degree rotation. Click appl. Let's finish
the sketch there. Right click on that plane, and we'll turn off
the visibility. So right click and press V, and then once again extrude that profile 20 millimeters.
That's correct. And we have our two lobes. Let's go ahead and put
in the camshaft now. We'll start a two D
sketch on this face here. Draw a circle from the origin. Let's do this 25 millimeters. Go on three D model and
extrude that profile. I've calculated this
at 180 degrees. Then let's extend that
shaft from this face. So we'll create a
two D sketch here. We'll project the shaft and
extrude that profile there, except we're going to do
this by 40 millimeters. Okay, that's looking good. Go ahead and tidy this up a bit, so let's put some fillets on this edge and also the same
edges on the other lobe. Is a one mil fillets? That's okay. Let's put it in
a hamper on this edge here. It's a two mill hamper, and we'll put in a mounting
hole on this face. So let's go to
create two D sketch. Put a circle in there,
let's do 5 millimeters, let's extrude
that's extrude cut. And just for visual, we'll just extrude cut that by two mil that's looking good. Let's go ahead and mirror. So let's choose the
mirror command. And for the features, we'll
select every feature we have. So the first lobe,
the second lobe, have one part of the shaft, the other part,
billets of the lobes, hampor of the shaft
and the through hole. Sorry, the extrude cut
on the shaft here. And a mirror plane,
we'll rotate the part, and we'll select
this plane here. Review looks good.
Let's hit Okay. And then let's just apply
some appearances to make this a bit more
aesthetically pleasing. Let's select all the lobes, hold down control, keep drawing boxes around
each of the lobes. Under the appearance menu, we will select the
glossy black appearance. And then let's do the same
process for the shaft. So select all the
components of the shaft. And for this appearance,
let's use let's use semi polished Save. That looks good. And there
we have our camshaft. If you have any
questions, please put them in a comment section, but aside from that, I will see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
81. Loft Modelling Example - Mounted Hook: In this tutorial,
we will learn how to draw a wall mounted hook. To start with, let's
draw the base plate. So we'll go to sketch. We'll
start a new two D sketch. Let's do this on the Y Z plane, and we'll select the two
point center rectangle tool. We'll start this at the origin, and we'll input a height of
20 mil and a width of 60. Let's then go a three D model, and let's extrude that profile by 3 millimeters. Press Okay. And let's go to the
three D model tab and start to apply some fillets. Let's make these
ten milads we'll apply these to both of the
bottom corners just here. Press Okay. Looking good. We now need to identify where we want our
countersunk holes to go. Let's select this
face, create sketch. Then we'll then put
these four points. We can just put them
anywhere for the time being, and then we'll
select the dimension tool dimension these up. So from the top line,
this center point of this countersunk hole
will be 5 millimeters. And then from the sideline here, it will be, again,
5 millimeters. From this hole down
to the bottom line, it will be five mill. And then from the
sideline here will be 15, exactly the same for the
ones on the other side. So let's take the
horizontal constraint, make these two horizontal, make these two horizontal. And then we just
need to dimension this one from this line at five mill and this one
from this line at 15 mil. And there we have
fully constrained the center points of
all of our four holes. So let's finish
the sketch there. Let's go the three D model, and we'll select
the hole command. For this, so, yep,
inventor has already selected the positions.
Another type of hole. There'll be a through hole, and there'll be a seat
which is countersunk. Termination will be through all, and that's the
correct direction. We want this dimension
here to be 6 millimeters. And this dimension down here is 3 millimeters with 90
degrees, that's correct. Let's press Okay. We now have our four countersunk holes
for mounting this to a wall. And next, let's draw
the sphere at the top. So for this, we'll go
into the origin folder, and we'll select the XY plane. Let's right click on that,
select the new sketch. Let's put in the circle, which will become the sphere. So this is a diameter of 15 mil. Then we can dimension
from the center point to the very bottom of the
plate. That'll be 60 mill. And then, again, from
the center point to the front face of the plate. This will be 70 mil. Sorry, it's 17 and
then we can put a line in from the top to
the bottom of the circle, and this will be our
line of revolution. We can go to three D model
and select the revolve tool, can select half the profile, and then select the line of
revolution and press Okay. And there we have the
sphere of our model. And next, we need to model
the arm of our hook. So for this, let's
select this face here. We'll go on to create sketch. And we're just going to draw
in a triangle, like so. So we'll do two lines
there, join those up. Let's put an equal constraint between these two lines here so that they are at the same
angle and the same length. Let's then use the vertical
constraint between the origin and the join
between the two lines. And then we can
input a dimension between these two
endpoints here, which will be 16 millimeters.
That's looking good. And so the idea here is that
we will use the loft command to loft from this
triangle profile here up to an eclipse profile, which will come on a separate plane which we'll input now. But let's select the XZ plane, and then we'll
create a new plane. We'll offset that from the plane at 44 millimeters. Press okay. Got our new plane
here, and we can see that it intersects
the sphere. Let's select that plane,
create Tod's sketch, and let's select the circle
tool and go into Eclipse. Let's start this from
the center and define our first axis point and
our second axis point, and then we need to
dimension these two. So this dimension here
will be 3 millimeters, and this dimension here
will be 4 millimeters. Then need to project the
geometry of this sphere. So let's select
the circumference. Then we can select the
coincident constraint and put a constraint between
the two center points. So the center point
of the sphere and the center point of
our eclipse, like so. That's now fully constrained.
Press finished sketch. It's looking good. Let's
right click on this plane, press V on the
keyboard, hide that. Let's just go into sketch
13, edit that sketch. Let's just right click
on the circumference of the sphere and put that
as a construction line. Finished sketch. There we go. Now the only thing left to
do is to put in the guides. And so to do this, let's start a new sketch on the XY plane. Let's go a new sketch. Now I want to select my eclipse, and I want to project
that geometry. So I'm going to select
the eclipse here. As you can see, we've
now got this yellow line which we can use as reference. So let's go on the Arc
tool in the front view. Let's select this corner here, and we want to go right to
the end of our eclipse. And for the radius
here, we'll input 70 stay using the arc tool, and we'll go from the
bottom corner at this time, and we'll go to the
end of our eclipse, which ends just here. We'll then put a rad
of 100, that's okay. And these are two guides, which will be used
for the loft tool. So let's finish
the sketch there. The very last thing
to do is to get a three D model,
select the loft to. And first, we need to
identify our sections. So let's add two sketches. Number one will be sketch 11. And the second one
will be our Eclipse, which is this one here. And for the rails, we'll just identify these as
being sketch 15, which are the two
radii lines here. It's okay. Now you can see the preview looks
good. Select okay. There we have our completed
wall mounted hook. Any questions, please put
them in a comment section. But aside from that, I will see you in the next
tutorial. Thank you.
82. Modelling a Spanner: In this tutorial, we will
model a combination spanner. So let's start by a two
D sketch on the Z plane, and we'll start with
a horizontal line, which will be 110
mill in length. And then we'll just
right click, put that as a construction line and select
the coincident constraint, and we'll put that
constraint between the center point of the
line and the origin, and we use this as the basis of the construction of this
combination spanner. On the right hand side,
we have a circle here, and then we have a
hexagonal profile. So the circle is 16 mil. Then for the hex profile, select the drop down on
the rectangle tools, we'll select the polygon tool. Make sure it's six sides, start the origin here, draw up, like so, and we'll put
another one in like that. Let's put a
horizontal constraint on one of the hexes and then a vertical constraint
on the other one. That's dimension
between the endpoints of this one as ten mil, and then we'll just do two
points of the other one. Again, there's ten more. I'm just going to
go ahead and remove the lines using the trim tool, so we'll select the
individual lines here, which we don't need. That's looking good. And now coming over
to the other side, let's do the other head
with the profile there. So this is made up a
series of eclipses. So if we go on the drop
down of the circle tool, we'll select the ellipse, we'll draw in three of these. So we'll start at the end point of our constructional line. We'll just put them
as a slight angle. We'll put in one ellipse put
in the second one there, and then the third one, like so. And then we'll just put in
a line from the endpoint of our construction line to the
top of the first ellipse, same to the second one and
the same to the third. I'm going to right
click on each of these lines and put them
as a construction line. And then we'll put one more line in from the endpoint at
this construction line, and we'll put that also
as a construction line, and then we'll dimension
between one of the construction lines and
this one as ten degrees. So that's our angle, and then
we'll go ahead and we'll dimension the axis of
each of the ellipse. So we'll start with
the smallest one. So the major axis is five,
and the minor is three. Then we'll go for
the center ellipse, but the major in
this case is 11, and the minor is nine. Then for the largest one, this will actually be the
minor in this case, which is 11 due to
its orientation, and the major will be 12.5. It's looking good, so we've got our three ellipses in there. Let's use the line tool from the top of our smaller quadrant. We'll just bring
that out. We'll use the tangential
constraint between that line and the eclipse. We do exactly the same
on the other side. Use the tangent tool between
that line and the eclipse. I'll just put in a
parallel constraint between the two lines to
make sure they are parallel, and then we'll use
the trim tool and take away these two lines here. Also going to take
away this arc, this one, and also this one. So now we can start to
see the foundation, at least of our spanner. Go ahead on the three
D model tool tab and select the extrusion tool. Go on to the top view, rotate that, and we'll select the profiles we wish to extrude. So we'll take these
two, this one, and we'll take this
profile as well. Let's extrude these by
five and select Okay. We have two heads
and the profiles. Now we just need
to input the body. And for this, I recommend
inputting a plane. So we'll do midplane between
two existing planes. Let's select this one
as the first reference, and this one as the second. We have our plane, put
in the center there. Let's left click on that and
create a new two D sketch. And for this, I'm going to
draw in a two point rectangle. Dimension, the height of this is ten.'s a coincident constraint
between this corner, this ellipse and this
corner and this ellipse. That's looking good. Let's
go ahead on three D model. Let's extrude that,
select the profile. We'll select a symmetric
in terms of the dimension, direction, and we'll select that as 4 millimeters, press okay. Let's now use the Phillip tool. Let's select all of our corners. Like so, and we'll
input here 15 mill. There are 15 mill fillets. Let's right click
on that work plane, press V on the keyboard,
hide the visibility. Then we just need to
put in the depressions on this face and this face. Let's create a two D
sketch on this face. Then for this, we'll use
the center point slot tool. We'll start this
at the origin and we'll come across about 35 mil, and that will have a diameter of six looking good, that's
fully constrained. Again, three D model. Let's extrude, cut that, let's extrude cut that
by 0.5 mil plus o. Now, we need to do the
same on the other side. So to do this, we're just
going to mirror this feature. So let's mirror we'll
select that feature. So in this case, extrusion six, and we'll mirror plane, we'll select the plane in
which we input before. So W plane two, select the ok. And then we have the
depression on both sides, and there we have our
completed spanner. Thank you very much, and I'll see you in the next tutorial.